‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪.1‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬‫‪.2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪.3‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪.4‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪.5‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪.6‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫‪.7‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪.8‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪.9‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪ .10‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫‪ .11‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫‪ .12‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪ .13‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء‬‫ً‬‫ﻭﻋﻤﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻧﺘﺠﺖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺮﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺇَﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Olympus‬‬.‫ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺧﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

Information for Your Safety

IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONSWhen using your photographic equipment, basic safety precautions should always befollowed, including the following:• Read and understand all instructions before using.
• Close supervision is necessary when any flash is used by or near children. Do not leave
flash unattended while in use.
• Care must be taken as burns can occur from touching hot parts.
• Do not operate if the flash has been dropped or damaged - until it has been examined byqualified service personnel.
• Let flash cool completely before putting away.
• To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not immerse this flash in water or other liquids.
• To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this flash, but take it to qualified
service personnel when service or repair work is required. Incorrect reassembly cancause electric shock when the flash is used subsequently.
• The use of an accessory attachment not recommended by the manufacturer may cause arisk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬.‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬‫ ﺗﺤﺬﺭ‬.‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‬.‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺠﻨﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬.‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬.‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺳﺘﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬.‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‬

$
%
g
AR 2

‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ‪9 ...................‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪10 .....................................‬‬‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ‪12 ..........................‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪13 ....................................‬‬‫ﺧﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪13 ...................................‬‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪14 ............................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪27 ................................‬‬‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪27 ..................................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪28 ...................................‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫)]‪28 ......................... ([Share Order‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫)]‪,[Erase Selected], [0‬‬‫]‪28 ........... ([Share Order Selected‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪29 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪29 .........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪15 .............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪16 ...............................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪30 ...............‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪30 ..................‬‬‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪31 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪17 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪18‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪18 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ‪19 .....................‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪20 ..................................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪22 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪22 .........‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪23 .....‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪24 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ‪24 .......................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪26‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪26 ............‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪26 ................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪27 ..........................‬‬‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪27 .................................‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫‪30‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪32 .........................‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ "ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ"‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪32 ...........................(P‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫)‪ A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪ -‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪33 .............‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫)‪ S‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ‪34 .....................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫)‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ( ‪35 ..........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ( ‪36 ..................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪37 ................... (n‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫]‪37 ............................[Movie Effect‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪39 ..............PHOTO STORY‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪42 ....................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪44 ........................‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‪46 ...............‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‬‫)ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء(‪46 .................‬‬‫‪3 AR‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪46 ...............‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬‫)‪47 ..................................(AF Area‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺪﻑ ‪47 ............................... AF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺸﻒ ﺣﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪48 .........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪49 ........................................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪50 .................‬‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪50 ...............‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪51 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪52 .......‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪53 .........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪56‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪56 ...................‬‬‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪57 ......‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ‪58 .........‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪60 ...........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪61 ..................................‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪62 ...........................‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪62 .........................‬‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ‪63 ..............‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪65 ...............‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫)ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪68 .........................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ(‪68 ........................................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )‪69 ..........(AF mode‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪70 ................................. ISO‬‬‫‪AR 4‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪70 ..................‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫‪71‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪71 .........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪/1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪72 .........................................2‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ‪72 ................‬‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ‪72 ..........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ( ‪73 ..................................‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )‪73 ....... (Myset‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪74 ...........‬‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪75 .........................(K‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ)‪75 .............. (j/Y‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ(‪76 ................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪78 .............................. (HDR‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺿﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺟﺪﺓ )ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ( ‪79 ................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‪80 ......................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪81 .....‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬‫)‪81 ............. (Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪81 ...........................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ )‪81 ............... (R‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪82 ..........................‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪83 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪84 ............................‬‬‫‪) X‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪84 ....................‬‬‫‪) W‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪84 .................‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪85 .......................‬‬‫‪85 .................................. R AF/MF‬‬‫‪86 .......................... S Button/Dial‬‬‫‪86 ......................... T Release/j‬‬‫‪87 ..........................U Disp/8/PC‬‬‫‪88 ......................... V Exp/p/ISO‬‬‫‪89 ........................... W # Custom‬‬‫‪90 ......................X K/Color/WB‬‬‫‪91 .......................Y Record/Erase‬‬‫‪92 ................................... Z Movie‬‬‫‪92 .............................. b K Utility‬‬‫‪93 ................................... AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪93 ....... MF‬‬‫‪94 ........................ Button Function‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪96 ...........‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪97 ..................‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪99 .....................‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪100 .................................‬‬‫ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪101 .................................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬‫‪101 ............... OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪A OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪102 ......................................Share‬‬‫‪B OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪103 ..................................... Album‬‬‫‪103 ........ C Electronic Viewfinder‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪104‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪105 ....................‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪106 ............‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪107 ...................(Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪108‬‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪108 .. OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪110 ......... OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫‪) i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪84 ..................‬‬‫‪84 .................................. Rec View‬‬‫‪84 ........................... Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫‪84 ..................c/# Menu Display‬‬‫‪84 .................................. Firmware‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪106‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )‪111 .......... (PictBridge‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ ‪111 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪112 .........................‬‬‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪113 ......................(DPOF‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪113 ..........................‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪114 ...........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪115‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪115 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ‪115 .........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪116 ............................‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪117 ..........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫‪118‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪118 ..................M.ZUIKO DIGITAL‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫‪122‬‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )‪122 .............(VF-4‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪124 .....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪124 .............‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪105 .....................‬‬‫‪5 AR‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪126 ..............‬‬‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪127 ............................‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪128 ....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪130‬‬‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪130 .................‬‬‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪132 ......................................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪134 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪134 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪134 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪134 ................................‬‬‫‪ - Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﺤﺺ‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪135 .....................‬‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪136 .....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪141 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪144‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪144 .................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫‪AR 6‬‬‫‪150‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪g‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬‫‪(A) iAUTO‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺳﻬﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬‫ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪(ART‬‬‫‪44‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫‪62‬‬‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )‪(SCN‬‬‫‪42‬‬‫ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪24‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‬‫‪46‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪24‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ً‬‫ﺇﺣﺴﺎﺳﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ‬‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ‬‫ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )‪(SCN‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪(ART‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬‫ﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪/‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪33‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪34‬‬‫‪42‬‬‫‪58‬‬‫‪59‬‬‫‪60‬‬‫‪44‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪47‬‬‫‪49‬‬‫‪49‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪) C-AF+TR‬ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫‪69‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ISO/DIS‬‬‫‪70/42‬‬‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ /‬ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪z‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬‫ﻟﻸﺿﻮﺍء‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬‫ُﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )‪(SCN‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪/‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬‫‪89/57‬‬‫‪61‬‬‫‪127‬‬‫‪65‬‬‫‪74‬‬‫‪35‬‬‫‪36‬‬‫‪42‬‬‫‪74‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻸﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫‪46/31‬‬‫‪46‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻄﺨﺎﺕ(‬‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‬‫‪88‬‬‫ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪/‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ /‬ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪87/84‬‬‫‪7 AR‬‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪94‬‬‫‪94‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫‪31‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻤﺪ‬‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫‪87‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪ q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬‫‪84‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ q) 2‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ(‬‫‪88‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪61‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )‪(SCN‬‬‫‪42‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫‪61‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬‫‪88‬‬‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫‪63‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪LAN‬‬‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﻖ‬‫‪g‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ /HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬‫‪55‬‬‫ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪(JPEG‬‬‫‪82‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪(JPEG‬‬‫‪82‬‬‫ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫‪111‬‬‫‪87‬‬‫‪96‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫‪113‬‬‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬‫ﺻﺪﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﺍﺳﻠﺔ ‪OLYMPUS‬‬‫‪101‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪105‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫‪106‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪AR 8‬‬‫‪106‬‬‫‪g‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫‪16‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬‫‪73‬‬‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Myset‬‬‫‪73‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪84‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪) 8‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺎﺭﺓ(‬‫‪88‬‬

‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬‫‪CB-USB6‬‬‫• ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫‪BLS-50‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪FL-LM1‬‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬‫ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫‪BCS-5‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺃﺧﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬‫•‬‫ً‬‫‪9 AR‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪a‬‬
‫‪7‬‬

‫‪b‬‬

‫‪f‬‬

‫‪g‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪i‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪17 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪18 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺯﺭ ‪ .................................. ON/OFF‬ﺹ‪15 .‬‬‫‪ ............................ *Control dial P 4‬ﺹ‪26 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺛﻘﺐ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪9 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪14 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪(.‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﻏﻄﺎء ‪Hot shoe‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ ‪ .....................‬ﺹ‪83 ,70 ,54 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ /‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪/61 .‬ﺹ‪85 .‬‬‫*‬‫‪AR 10‬‬‫‪d‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪14 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪ c‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‬‫‪ d‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ......................‬ﺹ‪12 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ....................‬ﺹ‪12 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬‫‪ g‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ ....................‬ﺹ‪111 ,108 ,96 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩ( ‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪96 .‬‬‫‪ i‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪13 .‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ P‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬

‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪)F‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ‪ /‬ﺯﺭ ‪) F‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء(‬‫)ﺹ‪(46 .‬‬‫‪) H‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ( ‪ /‬ﺯﺭ‪) P‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ( )ﺹ‪(47 .‬‬‫‪) I‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ‪ /‬ﺯﺭ‪) #‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫)ﺹ‪(65 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Q‬ﺹ‪(71 ,56 .‬‬‫‪) G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ‪ /‬ﺯﺭ ‪jY‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ(‬‫)ﺹ‪(61 .‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .....................‬ﺹ‪50 ،31 ،29 ،22 ،15 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ ............................‬ﺹ‪140 ،101 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ............................‬ﺹ‪124 .‬‬‫‪ G/Fn 5‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪24 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .................................... U‬ﺹ‪49 ،38 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺯﺭ ‪) R‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪............... H/‬ﺹ‪37 ،28 ،20 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺯﺭ ‪ .....................................MENU‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺯﺭ ‪) INFO‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ( ‪ ..............‬ﺹ‪31 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ................................... Q‬ﺹ‪71 ،56 .‬‬‫‪ ....................................*Arrow pad a‬ﺹ‪26 .‬‬‫‪ q b‬ﺯﺭ )ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ( ‪ ...............‬ﺹ‪52 ،26 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﺯﺭ )ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ(‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪28 .‬‬‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪ FGHI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪11 AR‬‬‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ )‪(‬‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ٍ‬‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫)ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪$‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ "ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(115 .‬‬‫‪AR 12‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﱢ‬‫‪" g‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪(116 .‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪ (116 .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫)ﺹ‪.(30 .‬‬‫‪13 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺣﻤﺮﺍء( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ )ﺣﻤﺮﺍء( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ )ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ‪.(3‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪UNLOCK‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪UNLOCK‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ )‪(1‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪.(2‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ )‪(4‬‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.(3) UNLOCK‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺨﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ" )ﺹ‪(118 .‬‬‫‪AR 14‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬‫‪ ‬ﺯﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫; )ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪) :‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫] )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(19 .‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ" )ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ )ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،q‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗُﺮﻛﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪15 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪MENU‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [X‬ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪) [d‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Setup Menu‬‬‫‪’--.--.-- --:--‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪0.5sec‬‬‫‪Rec View‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫‪Menu Display‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [d‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [X‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.I‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫‪ Back‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪[d‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫‪Y/M/D‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪2014‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪$‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ 0‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪.[min‬‬‫‪AR 16‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬

‫‪A‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪A‬‬

‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ‬‫ﺷﻲء‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬‫ﻟﻸﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪n‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪SCN‬‬‫‪ART‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ .PHOTO STORY‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.A .‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫‪17 AR‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻨﺼﻔﻪ(‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ) (‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ )ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ‪ ،AF‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(130 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﻛﺎﻣﻞ(‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻛﻠﻴًﺎ‬‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ" ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ( ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ"‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫‪$‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪" g‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ" )ﺹ‪(22 .‬‬‫‪AR 18‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻭﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ )ﻣﻘﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪45:67:89‬‬‫‪2341‬‬‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺻﺎﻟﺤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(A) iAUTO‬‬‫‪ C‬ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬‫‪D‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ )ﺹ‪.(61 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ‪ C‬ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪" g .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ" )ﺹ‪(106 .‬‬‫‪19 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ .(PHOTO STORY) J‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫)ﺹ‪.(22 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪42mm‬‬‫‪00:02:18‬‬‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،CMOS‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ً‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺿﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺿﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ )ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪/(.‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺿﻮﺍء‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/Panorama/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Hand-Held ،e-Portrait) SCN‬‬‫‪/(3D،Starlight‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‬‫‪AR 20‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(Movie+Photo‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )‪ .(mode1‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .R‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ‪.(16:9) XN‬‬‫• ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪ .(mode2‬ﻓﻲ ‪ ،mode2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ g‬ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪) [Movie+Photo‬ﺹ‪(92 .‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ‪ mode2‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻮ ‪ H) Motion JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(I‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.mode2‬‬‫‪21 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫•‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪/e-portrait/3D/Panorama‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺿﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪/‬ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻇﺎﻓﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺷﻴﺎء ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ SCN، ART‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .J‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪V‬‬

‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ) ‪( V‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ S‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪5x‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ Y‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫•‬‫•‬‫‪AR 22‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪ Z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪" g‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ" )ﺹ‪(104 .‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪23 AR‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .(A) iAUTO‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ iAUTO‬ﻭﺿﻌًﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬‫ً‬‫ﺳﻬﻼ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ً‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫•‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻀﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ a‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ k‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Shooting Tips‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪ a‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Blur‬‬‫‪ [Background‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[Express Motions‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 2‬ﻭ‪.3‬‬‫•‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻸﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫•‬‫‪AR 24‬‬‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫‪Clear & Vivid‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪Flat & Muted‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ [Blur Background‬ﻭ]‪ [Express Motions‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[YN+RAW‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪.RAW‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪.[Blurred Motion‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪25 AR‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.q‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪q‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪100-0004‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫•‬‫•‬‫ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ G‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪ Q‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪2014.7‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪10‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪AR 26‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ U‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ؛ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ G‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫]‪ [Movie Play‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪Movie‬‬‫‪Movie Play‬‬‫‪Share Order‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪00:00:02/00:00:14‬‬‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [0‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪،Q‬‬‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ‪ G‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ( ‪ .0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ‪ G‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪" g‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )]‪, [0], [Share Order Selected‬‬‫]‪) "([Erase Selected‬ﺹ‪(28 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺭﻣﺰ )ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫•‬‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪27 AR‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Quick Erase] g‬ﺹ‪(91 .‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Yes‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )]‪([Share Order‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Share Order‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ,Q‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ‪.h‬‬‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .G‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪" g‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )]‪"([Erase Selected], [0], [Share Order Selected‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ 200‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ H) JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (I‬ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )]‪([Erase Selected], [0], [Share Order Selected‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ]‪ [Share Order Selected‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ,[0‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪.[Erase Selected‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ H‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ )ﺹ‪ (29 .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ؛ ﺳﻮﻑ‬‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ v‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ H‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [Share Order Selected‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪ [0‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[Erase Selected‬‬‫‪AR 28‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬‫• ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ‪.P‬‬‫• ﻣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ P‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬‫• ﻣﺮﺭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪Q‬ﺃﻭ ‪ R‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ R‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪H‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪" g‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )]‪) "([Share Order‬ﺹ‪(28 .‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫ﻳﺤﻤﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻇﺎﻓﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺷﻴﺎء ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪29 AR‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪cd‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪e UTO1‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪g TO‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪i 3‬‬‫‪j N‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪m‬‬

‫‪1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0a‬‬‫‪b‬‬‫‪off‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi FP RC BKT‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪-2.0‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬

‫‪C‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫‪x‬‬

‫‪+7‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪-3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪13 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ .......‬ﺹ‪107 ،23 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ..........................‬ﺹ‪124 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ...................................... RC‬ﺹ‪124 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .................HDR /‬ﺹ‪/76 .‬ﺹ‪78 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪79 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪87 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪81 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺖ ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪80 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ ‪ .......................‬ﺹ‪48 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ /‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ‪ ...... m‬ﺹ‪/121 .‬ﺹ‪133 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ..............................................‬ﺹ‪65 .‬‬‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪ :‬ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻳﻀﻲء‪ :‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬‫‪ d‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ......................‬ﺹ‪18 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪57 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪44 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪42 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪AR 30‬‬‫‪FPS‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫‪q‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪utsr‬‬‫‪ g‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪58 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻨﻊ‬‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪89 ،61 .‬‬‫‪ i‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫‪ j‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪ ...................‬ﺹ‪63 .‬‬‫‪ k‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪64 .‬‬‫‪ l‬ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬‫‪ m‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ‪ .....................‬ﺹ‪117 .‬‬‫‪ n‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻞ ‪ .......................‬ﺹ‪46 .‬‬‫‪ o‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ..........................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪ ................‬ﺹ‪46 .‬‬‫‪ p‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ‪ .................‬ﺹ‪46 .‬‬‫‪ q‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪35 – 32 .‬‬‫‪ r‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪35 – 32 .‬‬‫‪ s‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪31 .‬‬‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ‪ .............................................‬ﺹ‪94 .‬‬‫‪ u‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪93 .‬‬‫‪ v‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪44 – 32 ،17 .‬‬‫‪ w‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .....................................Myset‬ﺹ‪73 .‬‬‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪22 .‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫‪ z‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ .................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪69 .‬‬‫‪ B‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫‪ C‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪65 .‬‬‫‪ D‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫; ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬‫‪ :‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ )ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‪ :‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪ E‬ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ ............................‬ﺹ‪24 .‬‬‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪. INFO‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬‫ﺃﻗﻞ‬‫ﻣﻀﻲء‬‫ﻣﻌﺘﻢ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ" ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ "ﺍﻟﻔﻘﻲ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪31 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ "ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ" )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪(P‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.P‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪P‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ(‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪"60 F2.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪4000 F22‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪) [ISO] g .‬ﺹ‪(70 .‬‬‫)‪Program shift (Ps‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ ،ART‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (F) ،F‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪ (P‬ﺃﻭ ‪.FG‬‬‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "‪ "s‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ FG‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ "‪ "s‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 32‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪Ps‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ)‪ A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪ -‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺪﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.A‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪.(P‬‬‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ,(F) F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ F‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪،‬‬‫ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﻔﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪F‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪F2.8 F4.0 F5.6 F8.0 F11‬‬‫• ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ(‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪F5.6‬‬‫‪"60‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪F5.6‬‬‫‪4000‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪) [ISO] g .‬ﺹ‪(70 .‬‬‫‪33 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪ S‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺗﺪﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.S‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ,(F) F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ‬‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ‪‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‬‫‪60"  15  30 60 125 250 4000‬‬‫• ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬‫‪F2.8‬‬‫‪2000‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫‪F22‬‬‫‪125‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪) [ISO] g .‬ﺹ‪(70 .‬‬‫‪AR 34‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )‪ M‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ً‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،M‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪ (P‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،(F) F‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪ (P‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫•‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺃﻣﺜﻞ )ﺗﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﻧﺎﻗﺺ( ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻄﺎء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ )ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﺯﺍﺋﺪ( ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1/4000‬ﻭ ‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪ [BULB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[LIVE TIME‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[LIVECOMP‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ ،[Noise Reduct.‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻻ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻴﺌﻴﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺦ( ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ٍ ISO‬‬‫ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‪) [Noise Reduct.] g .‬ﺹ‪(88 .‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‪ /‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ(‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [BULB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[LIVE TIME‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ )‪:(BULB‬‬‫ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ )‪ :(TIME‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪) "BULB/TIME Monitor" g‬ﺹ‪(89 .‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[LIVE TIME‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬‫• ]‪) [Live BULB‬ﺹ‪ (89 .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪35 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺹ‪.(127 .‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻘﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ /‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ /‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ*ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫*ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟـ ]‪ [Live BULB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Live TIME‬ﺹ‪(89 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻛﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Composite Settings‬ﺹ‪.(89 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[LIVECOMP‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟـ]‪ ،[LIVECOMP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [Composite Settings‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻫﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﺿﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺹ‪.(127 .‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ /‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ AE‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ /‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 36‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪(n‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪ (n‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪" g .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ" )ﺹ‪(62 .‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟ ِﺘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ]‪[Movie Effect‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.n‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪W‬‬

‫ﺗﻼﺷﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫ﺻﺪﻯ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟ ِﺘﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟ ِﺘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫ﺻﺪﻯ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟ ِﺘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟ ِﺘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻻﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﺷﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻼﺷﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺻﺪﻯ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺻﺪﻯ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﻛﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FGHI‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﻚ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ U‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ N‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ U‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ O‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪37 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 1‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ‪ ،(92 ،21 .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [e-Portrait‬ﻭ]‪ [Diorama‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛـ ‪.Art Fade‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 38‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪PHOTO STORY‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.J‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Standard‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬‫‪B‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬‫‪C‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫‪D‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬‫‪F‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺎﺣﻜﺔ‬‫‪Q‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪FG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻧﺴﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،I‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪E‬‬‫‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬‫‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻧﺴﺐ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪HGF‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫•‬‫•‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.0‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫• ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Save‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Finish later‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(41 .‬‬‫]‪ :[Discard‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪39 AR‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪.O‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫‪250 F5.0‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬‫‪ 6‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 40‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ،PHOTO STORY‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﻮ ]‪/([Speed‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ .[YN+RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪PHOTO‬‬‫‪ STORY‬ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ .RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ]‪.[4:3‬‬‫• ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ]‪ [MF]،[S-AF] ،[AF Mode‬ﻭ ]‪ [S-AF+MF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ]‪([Speed‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪/INFO‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ Fn/INFO‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ ،PHOTO STORY‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺆﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪FG‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ‪ Works‬ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪ Q‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪41 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SCN‬‬‫• ﺳﺘُﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﺯ ﺍﺧﺮﺝ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪G‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‬‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‪ +‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‬‫ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ‬‫‪Hand-Held Starlight‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ‬‫ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‪ +‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬

‫‪H‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪Q‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪s‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪DIS‬‬‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬‫ﺷﻤﻌﺔ‬‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬‫ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬‫ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ )ﺹ‪(43 .‬‬‫( ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪ g‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﻲء ﻭﺍﻟﺜﻠﺞ‬‫‪n f‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‬‫‪ n w‬ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬‫‪ n m‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬‫‪ T‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫‪ J‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫‪AR 42‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[e-Portrait‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ]‪ .[e-Portrait‬ﻗﺪ‬‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫]‪ ,[n Wide-Angle], [n Fisheye Effect‬ﻭ ]‪ [n Macro‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ ,[Panorama], [Hand-Held Starlight], [e-Portrait‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[3D Photo‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Hand-Held Starlight‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ]‪ [3D Photo‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [3D Photo‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.1824 × 1024‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.RAW‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪.100%‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Panning‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺪﻓﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ً‬‫ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Panning‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ J‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ I‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﺸﻒ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Panning‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺼﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪" g‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ" )ﺹ‪(108 .‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SCN‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Panorama‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FGHI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺪﺍﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫]‪[3‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫]‪[2‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫• ‪z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ )‪ (g‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻷﻭﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪43 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.ART‬‬‫• ﺳﺘُﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﻳًﺎ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﺯ‬‫ﻭﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪AR 44‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪k‬‬

‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪Soft Focus‬‬‫‪l‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪ Pale&Light Color‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪m‬‬
‫‪n‬‬

‫‪Light Tone‬‬‫‪Grainy Film‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪Pin Hole‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﺘﻴﻢ‬‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪s‬‬‫‪Diorama‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪t‬‬‫‪Cross Process‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﺑﺮﺓ|| ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪u‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪Gentle Sepia‬‬‫‪Dramatic Tone‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Y‬‬‫‪Key Line‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻠﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺰﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻫﺘﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻭﺗﻨﻌﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Z‬‬‫‪Watercolor‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫‪Vintage‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﻭﻓﺎﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻼﺷﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪H‬‬‫‪Partial Color‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻻﻓﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻮﺣ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪u‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫)‪Art Filter‬‬‫‪(Bracket‬‬‫ﻛﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺸﻲء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬‫ﻧﺴﺨﺎ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ‪ART‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ I‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ II‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ*‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬‫* ﺗﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ .[YN+RAW‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ "ﺗﺤﺒﻴﺒًﺎ"‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺧﺸﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﻗﻞ‬‫ً‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪COLOR‬‬‫‪45 AR‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء )ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (F) F‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HI‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‬‫ً‬‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ )"–"( ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻇﻼﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬‫)"‪ ("+‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫‪.EV ±5.0‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ )‪(0‬‬‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )‪(-‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪(+‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‪ ،M، A ,‬ﺃﻭ ‪. SCN‬‬‫• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .±3.0 EV‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪ ،±3.0 EV‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.±3.0 EV‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (F) F‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ "ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ" ﻟﺘﻌﺘﻴﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺃﻭ "ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ" ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‬‫‪AR 46‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1234‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )‪(AF Area‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ً 81‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (H) P‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FGHI‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.AF‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ "‪ "All targets‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻫﺪﻑ ‪ AF‬ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ,[Image Aspect], [Digital Tele-converter‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺪﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺪﻑ ‪AF‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Face priority AF‬ﺹ‪.(48 .‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ (H) P‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪FG‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪) o‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ(‬‫‪) I‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪) K‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪) J‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ(‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪47 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺸﻒ ﺣﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )‪ (ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪J‬‬

‫‪Face Priority Off‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪I‬‬‫‪Face Priority On‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪K‬‬‫‪Face & Eye Priority On‬‬‫‪L‬‬‫‪Face & R. Eye Priority On‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Face & L. Eye Priority On‬‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺆﺑﺆ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺆﺑﺆ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺆﺑﺆ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺪﻓﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺸﻒ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫)ﻛﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﺸﻒ ﺣﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[C-AF‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺭ ])‪ ,[p (Digital ESP metering‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪ .[MF‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪.‬‬‫‪AR 48‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪Q/U‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫‪4‬‬‫)ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ(‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ U‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪FGHI‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪×5‬‬‫‪×7‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪×14‬‬‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ U‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪FGHI‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪.(P‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪.(IS‬‬‫‪49 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣُﺒﺴﻂ‬‫‪5 6 7 89‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪34‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪0‬‬
‫‪a‬‬

‫‪3D 4:3 L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫‪15‬‬

‫‪b‬‬

‫‪f‬‬

‫‪e d c‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪jk‬‬

‫‪l‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫‪r‬‬

‫‪F5.6‬‬‫‪45mm‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪250‬‬

‫‪g‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪+2.0‬‬‫‪+1.0‬‬‫‪G+4‬‬‫‪Adobe‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪A+4‬‬‫‪ISO 400‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪4608×3456‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪3D 4:3 L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫‪SD‬‬‫‪v uts‬‬‫‪AR 50‬‬‫‪w‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪15 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ .......‬ﺹ‪104 ،23 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪ ....‬ﺹ‪106 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪ ............................Eye-Fi‬ﺹ‪92 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺎﺕ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪113 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪28 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ ...............................................‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪28 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪91 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪ b‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬‫‪ c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪63 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪42 .‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻟـ‬‫‪ ........................... PHOTO STORY‬ﺹ‪41 .‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪.INFO‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪16 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﺣﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫‪ i‬ﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪........................‬ﺹ‪44 - 32 ،17 .‬‬‫‪ j‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪46 .‬‬‫‪ k‬ﺳﺮ ﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪35 - 32 .‬‬‫‪ l‬ﻗﻲ ﻣﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪35 - 32 .‬‬‫‪ m‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪121 .‬‬‫‪ n‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫‪ o‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫‪ p‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪90 .‬‬‫‪ q‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪ r‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪63 .‬‬‫‪ s‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪63 .‬‬‫‪ t‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ .................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ u‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪58 .‬‬‫‪ v‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪31 .‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣُﺒﺴﻂ‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪F5.6‬‬‫‪250‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪45mm‬‬‫‪+2.0‬‬‫‪G±10‬‬‫‪Adobe‬‬‫‪A±10‬‬‫‪ISO 400‬‬‫‪±0.0‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪4032×3024‬‬‫‪L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫‪51 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪2014.7‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪U‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪ 25‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪10‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫‪Q‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ(‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪G‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪×2‬‬‫‪14x‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪×14‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪AR 52‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪(P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪/t‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪s‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬‫)‪(FGHI‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )‪/(I‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )‪/(H‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪(FG‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪ :‬ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ)‪ (I‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )‪ (H‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪. INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪H‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪(28 .‬‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪(28 .‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪Share Order‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Rotate‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪ g JPEG Edit, RAW Data Edit‬ﺹ‪82 .‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪ g Image Overlay‬ﺹ‪83 .‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪Movie Play‬‬

‫ـــ‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪g Share Order‬ﺹ‪28 .‬‬‫‪‬‬‫‪*‬‬‫‪) 0‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪) R‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ(‬

‫‪‬‬

‫—‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪Rotate‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫—‬

‫)‪m (Slideshow‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪Erase‬‬‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )‪(Movie Play‬‬‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻻﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪HI‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪(P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪H/I‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻌﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪F/G‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪53 AR‬‬‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [0‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ,Q‬ﺛﻢ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ F‬ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) 0‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪" g .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫)]‪) "([Erase Selected], [0], [Share Order Selected‬ﺹ‪(28 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺭﻣﺰ )ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ(‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪4‬‬‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬‫ﺃﺿﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [R‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪Q‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪Share Order‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Rotate‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[No‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [R Start‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ‪.H‬‬‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Erase‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫‪R Start‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Rotate‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ F‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ G‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 54‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[m‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪Share Order‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Rotate‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Start‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪Start‬‬‫‪BGM‬‬‫‪Slide‬‬‫‪Slide Interval‬‬‫‪Movie Interval‬‬‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Joy‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‪.‬‬‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ٍ 10‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Full‬ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭ]‪ [Short‬ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ FG‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪ HI‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]‪ [Joy‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Olympus‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫]‪ [Joy‬ﻣﻦ ]‪ [BGM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .I‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪http://support.olympus-imaging.com/bgmdownload/‬‬‫‪55 AR‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪n ،M ،S ،A ،P‬‬‫ﻭ ‪.J‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ‪ K‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ,[Live Control‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ‬‫‪ ART‬ﻭ‪) .SCN‬ﺹ‪(97 .‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ...........................................‬ﺹ‪57 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪ ............................................‬ﺹ‪42 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪44 .‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪58 .‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ......................‬ﺹ‪61 .‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪63 .‬‬‫‪ n‬ﻭﺿﻊ‪ ................................................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ...........................................‬ﺹ‪65 .‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ............................................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪69 .‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ .......................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪ ............................................‬ﺹ‪48 .‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺗﺴﺮﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ 8‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪F‬‬
‫‪G‬‬

‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﺃﻭ ‪HI‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 56‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪Focal Length‬‬‫‪Auto I.S.‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪mm‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO 50‬‬‫‪S-IS‬‬‫‪S-IS‬‬‫‪OFF S-IS‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ‪ HI‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪S-IS1‬‬‫‪S-IS2‬‬‫‪Vertical Shake I.S.‬‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬‫)‪ (Y‬ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS3‬‬‫‪Horizontal Shake I.S.‬‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻄﻌﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ )‪(Z‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪Auto I.S.‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪OFF‬‬‫‪Movie-I.S. Off‬‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪ON‬‬‫‪Movie-I.S. On‬‬‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪OFF‬‬‫‪Still-I.S. Off‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪ All Direction Shake I.S.‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Micro Four Thirds/Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Four Thirds‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ ,[Image Stabilizer‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪INFO‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ use HI ,‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 8‬ﻣﻢ ﻭ‪ 1000‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻁ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Image Stabilizer‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[OFF‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[S-IS AUTO‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [S-IS1‬ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ‬‫]‪.[S-IS AUTO‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪57 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬‫ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ (WB‬ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ‬‫]‪ [AUTO‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺸﻞ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﺘﻌﻤﺪ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪AR 58‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪k‬‬‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﺰء ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪5300K‬‬‫ﺻﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ‬‫ٍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪7500K‬‬‫ﺻﺎﻑ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫ٍ‬

‫‪O‬‬

‫‪6000K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻠﺒﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪3000K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬‫>‬‫‪4000K‬‬‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺄﺿﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪5500K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺹ‪(59 .‬‬‫‪/Q/P‬‬‫‪X/W‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺎ ًء‬‫ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫‪CWB‬‬‫‪2000K‬‬‫‪–14000K‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﻗﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳُﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺿﻮء ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [W]، [Q]، [P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [X‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ 3،2،1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (4‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫‪.INFO‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ )ﺑﻴﺾء ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ( ﻻ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻇﻼﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺿﻊ ً‬‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫! ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺘﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]‪ [WB NG Retry‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻛﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪59 AR‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ)ﺹ‪ .(74 .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬

‫‪F‬‬

‫‪C‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫‪j‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪h‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪h‬‬

‫‪i-Enhance‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺜﻴﺮ ﻟﻺﻋﺠﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪Vivid‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Z‬‬‫‪Muted‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪a‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪J‬‬‫‪Monotone‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪K‬‬‫‪Custom‬‬‫ﻭﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ّ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪e-Portrait‬‬‫ﻳُﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻠﻤﺲ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Pop Art j‬‬‫‪Soft Focus k‬‬‫‪Pale&Light Color l‬‬‫‪Light Tone m‬‬‫‪Grainy Film n‬‬‫‪Pin Hole o‬‬‫‪Diorama s‬‬‫‪Cross Process t‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪ ” g‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ“ )ﺹ‪(44 .‬‬‫‪Gentle Sepia u‬‬‫‪Dramatic Tone v‬‬‫‪Key Line Y‬‬‫‪Watercolor Z‬‬‫‪Vintage G‬‬‫‪Partial Color* H‬‬‫* ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Partial Color‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ H،I‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 60‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ً‬‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟ ُﻤ َﻮ ﱢﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪Single‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪Yc‬‬‫‪Y12s Y2s‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪T‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫‪Sequential H‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫‪Sequential L‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪ 12 Y12s‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 3.5‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ]‪) [AF Mode‬ﺹ‪ (69 .‬ﻭ ]‪) [AEL/AFL‬ﺹ‪.(93 .‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪ً .‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪،‬‬‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Y2s‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪YC‬‬‫‪Custom‬‬‫‪Self-timer‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ ،[Interval Time] ،[Frame] ،[Y Timer‬ﻭ‬‫]‪.[Every Frame AF‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ,HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪.(P‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Every Frame AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[ON‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻛﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪o‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.G‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ‪ ،S‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ‪,T‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻒ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪61 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪) [4:3‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ [16:9‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [3:2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [1:1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[3:4‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ؛ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬‫‪ n‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،n‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪FG‬‬‫ﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪M-IS ON‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪Program Auto‬‬

‫‪F‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬
‫‪P‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪.(P‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.HI‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪.(P‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.HI‬‬‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪.(P‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.HI‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﻴﻦ ‪1/30‬ﺙ ﻭ‪ 1/4000‬ﺙ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪ .(P‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ، F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪ (P) l‬ﺃﻭ ‪.HI‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺘﻴﻦ ‪1/30‬ﺙ ﻭ‪ 1/4000‬ﺙ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 200‬ﻭ‪.3200‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ]‪ [Image Stabilizer‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﻳ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻴﺮ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [C-AF‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 62‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪4608x3456‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪L F+‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪SN‬‬‫‪MN‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪L‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭ ‪ XN ,YN ,YF) JPEG‬ﻭ ‪ RAW (WN‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ JPEG+RAW‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‬‫‪ RAW‬ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ JPEG‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ ,X ,Y‬ﻭ ‪ (W‬ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪ ,N ,F ,SF‬ﻭ ‪.(B‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪,WN/XN/YN/YF‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [K Set‬ﺹ‪ (90 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Custom Menu‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫*‪4608×3456‬‬‫‪) Y‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ(‬‫*‪3200×2400‬‬‫‪2560×1920‬‬‫‪) X‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‬‫‪1920×1440‬‬‫‪1600×1200‬‬‫*‪1280×960‬‬‫‪1024×768‬‬‫‪) W‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬‫‪640×480‬‬‫*‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬‫)ﺟﻴﺪ(‬‫‪*YN‬‬‫‪*YF‬‬‫‪B‬‬‫)ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ(‬‫‪YB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪*XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪*WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪SF‬‬‫)ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬‫‪YSF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‬‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪RAW‬‬‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )ﺑﺎﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ "‪ ("ORF.‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪" g .‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ" )ﺹ‪(82 .‬‬‫‪63 AR‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪AR 64‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫‪Full HD Fine‬‬‫‪1920×1080‬‬‫‪Full HD Normal‬‬‫‪1920×1080‬‬‫‪HD Fine‬‬‫‪1280×720‬‬‫‪HD Normal‬‬‫‪1280×720‬‬‫‪H‬‬‫‪1280×720‬‬‫‪I‬‬‫‪640×480‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬‫‪/MPEG-4 AVC‬‬‫‪*1H.264‬‬‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ‪*2JPEG‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫• ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 29‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻷﻯ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺮﻙ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺨﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺍء ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪UNLOCK‬‬‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ UNLOCK‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪UNLOCK‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫‪Flash Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪65 AR‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻢ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﻳﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪" g‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ" )ﺹ‪(67 .‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫!‪!/#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ S‬ﻭ‬‫‪ M‬ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪#SLOW‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‬‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪!SLOW‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‪/‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬‫ﻳﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺧﻠﻒ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫‪ ،INFO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪#SLOW2/‬‬‫‪2nd‬‬‫‪Curtain‬‬‫‪#FULL‬‬‫‪ #1/4‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ])ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء( !‪ ,[!/#‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ])ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء( !‪ [!/#‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1/250‬ﺙ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 66‬‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪A/P‬‬‫‪#AUTO‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫!‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫!‬‫‪SLOW‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬‫‪#SLOW‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‬‫‪SLOW2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫‪#‬‬‫‪M/S‬‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪-‬‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‬‫!‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‬‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪k‬‬‫‪2nd-C‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ‬‫‪ 1/30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪-‬‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪-‬‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪-‬‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‬‫• ‪ $ ,#AUTO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.A‬‬‫* ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1/180‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ FL-50R‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻈﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬‫ً‬‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻺﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪17mm f1.8‬‬‫‪25mm f1.8‬‬‫‪45mm f1.8‬‬‫‪14 – 42mm IIR‬‬‫‪14 – 42mm EZ‬‬‫‪40 – 150mm‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﺼﻮﻉ‬‫ﺣﺎﻓﻲ‬‫‪0.25‬ﻡ‬‫‪0.25‬ﻡ‬‫‪0.5‬ﻡ‬‫‪0.55‬ﻡ‬‫‪0.25‬ﻡ‬‫‪0.9‬ﻡ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ -f‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫‪67 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺎ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻀﺎ ًء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬
‫‪R‬‬

‫‪0.0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻴﺲ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.MANUAL‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺮﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪ESP‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪SH‬‬‫‪HI‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪p‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ‪ 324‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﺃﻭ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ]‪ [OFF‬ﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ]‪([I Face Priority‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪H‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎ‬‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ً‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬‫‪I‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 2%‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ(‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ IHI‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬‫‪ ISH‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 68‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )‪(AF mode‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ‪ AF mode‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AF‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪Single AF‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪TR‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪S-AF C-AF MF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫)‪S-AF (single AF‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫)‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ (‬‫‪MF‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬‫ﻭﺗﻀﻲء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺗﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﻲء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-AF‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬‫)‬‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪) S-AF+MF‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ mode‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪(MF‬‬‫‪C-AF+TR‬‬‫)ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪(AF‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[S-AF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ؛ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﺑﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺑﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻌﻘﺐ‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺿﻊ ً‬‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-AF‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺼﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ً‬‫‪69 AR‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﻴﺒﻲ( ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﻌﻒ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﻫﻲ ]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ‪ — ISO 200‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ً ISO‬‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪Recommended‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪500‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪320‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪250‬‬‫‪AUTO LOW 200‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪25600 – 200 ,‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫‪ 1‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.FG‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫‪Movie R On‬‬‫‪OFF ON‬‬‫‪ON‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ [AF Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [S-AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ‪ s‬ﻭﺿﻊ )‪.(Diorama‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ,[OFF‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.O‬‬‫‪AR 70‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬ﺉ‪.‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬‫‪X‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬‫‪q‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﻖ‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ‪*(85 .‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ EVF‬ﻭ ‪) OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺹ‪*(101 .‬‬‫‪d‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫*‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪j /Y‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Time Lapse Settings‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪Q‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪T Off‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫‪Y12s Off‬‬‫‪Y2s Off‬‬‫‪YC Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪j /Y‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Time Lapse Settings‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ‪ MENU‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(136 .‬‬‫‪71 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪/1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪2‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪1‬‬‫‪) Card Setup‬ﺹ‪(72 .‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪) Reset/Myset‬ﺹ‪(73 .‬‬‫‪) Picture Mode‬ﺹ‪(74 .‬‬‫‪. 75) K‬ﺹ(‬‫‪) Image Aspect‬ﺹ‪(62 .‬‬‫‪) Digital Tele-converter‬ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪2‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪) j/Y‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ(‬‫)ﺹ‪(75 ،61 .‬‬‫‪) Image Stabilizer‬ﺹ‪(57 .‬‬‫‪) Bracketing‬ﺹ‪(76 .‬‬‫‪. 78) HDR‬ﺹ(‬‫‪) Multiple Exposure‬ﺹ‪(79 .‬‬‫‪) Time Lapse Settings‬ﺹ‪(80 .‬‬‫‪ #‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) RC‬ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻛﺪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺯﻟﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺐﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪" g‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪(116 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Format‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Card Setup‬ﻓﻲ ‪ W‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪.1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪All Erase‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫• ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Card Setup‬ﻓﻲ‪ W‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪.1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [All Erase‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪All Erase‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫• ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AR 72‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Reset‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ‪ W‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪.1‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﺮﺍﺯ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻀﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬‫ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ]‪ [Full‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪" g‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" )ﺹ‪(136 .‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪Myset1‬‬‫‪Myset2‬‬‫‪Myset3‬‬‫‪Myset4‬‬‫‪Basic‬‬‫‪No Data‬‬‫‪No Data‬‬‫‪No Data‬‬‫‪No Data‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )‪(Myset‬‬‫ﺣﻔﻆ ‪Myset‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬‫‪ ،S، A، P،‬ﻭ‪.M‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ‪ W‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪.1‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ )]‪ ([Myset1]–[Myset4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫• ]‪ [Set‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ )]‪ ([Myset1]–[Myset4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Set‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Reset‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪" g Myset‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" )ﺹ‪(136 .‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Myset‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ‪.Myset‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ‪ W‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪.1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ )]‪([Myset1]–[Myset4‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Basic‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪Myset1‬‬‫‪Myset2‬‬‫‪Myset3‬‬‫‪Myset4‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪73 AR‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪. 60) [Picture Mode‬ﺹ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Picture Mode‬ﻓﻲ ‪ W‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪.1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ‪ FG‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪AR 74‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪i-a‬‬

‫‪J‬‬

‫‪K‬‬

‫‪Contrast‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪Sharpness‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪Saturation‬‬‫ﺯﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪Gradation‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫ً‬‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ [Normal‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪High Key‬‬‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‪.‬‬‫‪Low Key‬‬‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪Effect‬‬‫)‪(i-Enhance‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪B&W Filter‬‬‫)‪(Monotone‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬‫ﻭﺗﻐﻤﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪N:Neutral‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪Ye:Yellow‬‬‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺳﺤﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻤﺎء‬‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Or:Orange‬‬‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪R:Red‬‬‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻣﺰﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪G:Green‬‬‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬‫ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء‪.‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪h‬‬‫‪Pict. Tone‬‬‫)‪(Monotone‬‬‫‪i-a‬‬

‫‪K‬‬

‫‪J‬‬

‫ﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪N:Neutral‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪S:Sepia‬‬‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬‫‪B:Blue‬‬‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‬‫‪P:Purple‬‬‫ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬‫‪G:Green‬‬‫ﺧﻀﺮﺍء‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪.[Normal‬‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪(K‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ]‪ [K‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﻣﺰﻳﺞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭ]‪ [X‬ﻭ ]‪ [W‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ‪.‬‬‫]‪" g [Pixel Count] ،[K Set‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(" )ﺹ‪(63 .‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ)‪(j/Y‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [j/Y‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X‬ﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ )‪ [YC] (custom‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Time Lapse Settings‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Y Timer‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Interval Time‬‬‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Every Frame AF‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪75 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ(‬‫"ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ" ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺖ ﺗﺘﻢ "ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺘﻬﺎ" ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Bracketing‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪j /Y‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Time Lapse Settings‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،I‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ‪ Q‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪ ) AE BKT‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪(AE‬‬‫ﺗُﻐﻴّﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ EV 0.3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EV 0.7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .EV 1.0‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ 2 :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻭ ‪7‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ t‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪,(P‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪2f 0.3EV‬‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ ,(M‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ )ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪.(S‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪2f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪2f 1.0EV -‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV -‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ]‪.[EV Step‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV‬‬‫‪" g‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ" )ﺹ‪(85 .‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AR 76‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪ t‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪ ) WB BKT‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪(WB‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪ WB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪M، S، A، P‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ،4 ،2‬ﺃﻭ‪ 6‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻉ‪ -‬ﺯ‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺒﺮ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻭﺥ‪-‬ﺃ )ﺃﺧﻀﻀﺮ ‪-‬ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ(‬‫‪A-B‬‬‫‪G-M‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫‪3f 4Step‬‬‫‪3f 4Step‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪ ) FL BKT‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪(FL‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ t‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ]‪.[EV Step‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV‬‬‫‪" g‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ" )ﺹ‪(85 .‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV --‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪ ) ISO BKT‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬‫ﺗُﻐﻴّﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬‫‪ EV 0.3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EV 0.7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .EV 1.0‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴًﺎ‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻠﺒﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ‬‫ً‬‫ً‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟـ ]‪.[ISO Step‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪" g‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ" )ﺹ‪(85 .‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻊ ]‪.[ISO-Auto Set‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV -‬‬‫‪" g‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ" )ﺹ‪(85 .‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪3f 1.0EV -‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪) ART BKT‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪(ART‬‬‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ART BKT‬ﻭ ‪ WB BKT‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪Soft Focus‬‬‫‪Pale&Light Color‬‬‫‪Light Tone‬‬‫‪Grainy Film‬‬‫‪Pin Hole‬‬‫‪Diorama‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪77 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪(HDR‬‬‫ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ‪.(HDR‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [HDR‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ HDR‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Time Lapse Settings‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪HDR1‬‬‫‪HDR2‬‬‫‪3F 2.0EV‬‬‫‪5F 2.0EV‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ 4‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ‪ HDR2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺠﺎﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ .HDR1‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.200‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﻗﺒﻄﺄ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ ‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﻮ ‪ 4‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪7F 2.0EV‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪AR 78‬‬‫‪3F 3.0EV‬‬‫‪5F 3.0EV‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ HDR‬ﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Button Function‬ﺹ‪ ,(94 .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪.HDR‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪ HDR1‬ﻭ ‪ ،HDR2‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫• ﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑـ‪.HDR‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪ HDR1‬ﻭ ‪ ،HDR2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .RAW+JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫‪ RAW‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،HDR1/HDR2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Natural‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪ .[sRGB‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ]‪.[Full-time AF‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ‬‫ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺿﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺟﺪﺓ )ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‬‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﱢ‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫‪Auto Gain‬‬‫‪Overlay‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[2f‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪1/2‬‬‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪RAW‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬‫ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﻫﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫‪Auto Gain‬‬‫‪Overlay‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ‪ a‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫• ‪ a‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺄﻃﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫! ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ‬‫• ﻟﻤﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ RAW‬ﻟـ ]‪ [K‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Overlay‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪" g :RAW‬ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" )ﺹ‪(83 .‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Overlay‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ q‬ﺗﻢ ﺿﻐﻄﻪ ‪ /‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ / MENU‬ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬‫ﻋﻦ ‪/M، S، A، P‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ /‬ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ /‬ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[Overlay‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.JPEG+RAW‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﻔﻆ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Multiple Exposure‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪.2‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪79 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻛﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.M/S/A/P‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ]‪ [Time Lapse Settings‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪.2‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Start Waiting Time‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Interval Time‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Time Lapse Movie‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[On‬ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻳﻨﺸﺊ ﻭﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻲ ]‪ [(Motion JPEG (HD‬ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ 10‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪.MF‬‬‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ]‪ [Rec View‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ 31‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪AR 80‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [C-AF‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[C-AF+TR‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-AF‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‪ ،MENU‬ﻭﺯﺭ‪ ،q‬ﺯﺭ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪" g‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ" )ﺹ‪(124 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﻧﻔﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ×‪.2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻟـ ]‪ [Digital Tele-converter‬ﻓﻲ ‪ W‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪.1‬‬‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻌﻒ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪) m‬ﺹ‪(55 .‬‬‫‪) R‬ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪) Edit‬ﺹ‪(82 .‬‬‫‪) Print Order‬ﺹ‪(113 .‬‬‫‪) Reset Protect‬ﺹ‪(83 .‬‬‫‪) Connection to Smartphone‬ﺹ‪(104 .‬‬‫‪Playback Menu‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪R‬‬

‫‪Edit‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫‪Reset Protect‬‬‫‪Connection to Smartphone‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪,w, f, s, T‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.SCN‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]‪ [Movie Effect‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ [On‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭﺓ )‪(R‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﻳﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪81 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Edit‬ﻓﻲ ‪ q‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Sel. Image‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [JPEG Edit‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .JPEG‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬‫]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﻭ ]‪ .[JPEG Edit‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[JPEG Edit‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫]‪[Current‬‬‫‪RAW Data‬‬‫‪Edit‬‬‫]‪[Custom1‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫]‪[Custom2‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫]ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ[‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﻣُﻀﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫]ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء[‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[P‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ‪ FGHI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬

‫‪AR 82‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪O‬‬‫]‪ :[Aspect‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪) 4:3‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [3:2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [16:9‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [1:1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[3:4‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FGHI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Black & White‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Sepia‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Saturation‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Q‬ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،640 × 480 ،1280 × 960‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .320 × 240‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺨﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ‪) 4:3‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[e-Portrait‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )]‪ ،([Q‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ً‬‫ﺍﻷﺻﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [P‬ﻭ]‪ [Aspect‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 4:3‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Picture Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[ART‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ]‪ [Color Space‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[sRGB‬‬‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ]‪([YN+RAW‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ]‪ [Image Overlay‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Image Overlay‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ FGHI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،3‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪Image Overlay‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ FG‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ .2.0-0.1‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪×0.5‬‬‫‪×1.5‬‬‫‪×0.3‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Yes‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Edit‬ﻓﻲ ‪ q‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫! ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ‬‫• ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Image Overlay‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺃﺿﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟـ]‪ [R‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(54 .‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Reset Protect‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪83 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ d‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Setup Menu‬‬‫‪’--.--.-- --:--‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪0.5sec‬‬‫‪Rec View‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫‪Menu Display‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‬‫‪g‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪X‬‬‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪) W‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ‪ English‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪) i‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﻦ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪HI‬ﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ‬‫‪) j‬ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﺃﻭ ‪) k‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭ ‪ FG‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫]‪ [Natural‬ﻭ]‪.[Vivid‬‬‫‪Rec View‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﺤﺺ‬‫ﻭﺟﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻮًﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺤﺺ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[0.3sec] – [20sec‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Autoq‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ‬‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪104‬‬‫‪c/# Menu‬‬‫‪Display‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪AR 84‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪k‬‬‫‪+1‬‬‫—‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪-2‬‬‫—‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Vivid‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫—‬‫—‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.c Custom Menu‬‬‫‪Custom Menu‬‬‫‪Custom Menu‬‬‫‪R AF/MF‬‬‫‪S Button/Dial‬‬‫‪T Release/j‬‬‫‪U Disp/8/PC‬‬‫‪V Exp/p/ISO‬‬‫‪W # Custom‬‬‫‪X K/Color/WB‬‬‫‪AF Mode‬‬‫‪Full-time AF‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪Reset Lens‬‬‫‪BULB/TIME‬‬‫‪Focusing‬‬‫‪Focus Ring‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪MF‬‬‫‪P Set Home‬‬‫‪AF Illuminat.‬‬‫‪ I‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬‫‪AF Area Pointer‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪R AF/MF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻃﺮﻕ‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪.Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻳﺪ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )‪ .(MF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ‪ peaking‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ‪ p‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻕ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪g‬‬‫‪69‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫—‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪) AF/MF R‬ﺹ‪(85 .‬‬‫‪) Button/Dial S‬ﺹ‪(86 .‬‬‫‪) Release/j T‬ﺹ‪(86 .‬‬‫‪) Disp/8/PC U‬ﺹ‪(87 .‬‬‫‪) Exp/p/ISO V‬ﺹ‪(88 .‬‬‫‪) Custom # W‬ﺹ‪(89 .‬‬‫‪) K/Color/WB X‬ﺹ‪(90 .‬‬‫‪) Record/Erase Y‬ﺹ‪(91 .‬‬‫‪) Movie Z‬ﺹ‪(92 .‬‬‫‪) K Utility b‬ﺹ‪(92 .‬‬‫‪93‬‬‫—‬‫—‬‫—‬‫‪93‬‬‫—‬‫—‬‫‪48‬‬‫—‬‫‪85 AR‬‬‫‪S Button/Dial‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪Button Function‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪g‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪[FnFunction], [UFunction], [RFunction], [IFunction],‬‬‫]‪[GFunction], [nFunction], [lFunction‬‬‫‪Dial Function‬‬‫‪Dial Direction‬‬‫‪Mode Dial‬‬‫‪Function‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪.(P‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪% / F‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫‪Aperture value / F‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪F‬‬‫‪M‬‬

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ‪ /‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫]‪[Prev / Next] / [G / Magnify‬‬‫‪Rls Priority S‬‬‫‪Rls Priority C‬‬‫‪j L fps‬‬‫‪j H fps‬‬‫‪j Image‬‬‫‪Stabilization‬‬‫‪Half Way Rls‬‬‫‪With IS‬‬‫‪ .Lens I.S‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬‫‪Release Lag-Time‬‬‫—‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ ,S‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.F‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Myset‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Myset1] - [Myset4‬ﺹ‪ (73 .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫‪T Release/j‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪94‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪g‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪) S-AF‬ﺹ‪ (69 .‬ﻭ ‪) C-AF‬ﺹ‪.(69 .‬‬‫—‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪ [S‬ﻭ ]‪ .[T‬ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) IS‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬‫ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[Short‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪*.‬‬‫* ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 86‬‬‫‪61‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬

‫‪U‬‬‫‪U Disp/8/PC‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪g‬‬‫‪HDMI‬‬‫]‪ :[HDMI Out‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬‫‪.HDMI‬‬‫]‪ :[HDMI Control‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫‪96‬‬‫‪Video Out‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )]‪ [NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ([PAL‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪96‬‬‫‪KControl‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪) Live SCP‬ﺹ‪(98 .‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪) Live Guide‬ﺹ‪(24 .‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫‪Art Menu‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫‪‬‬

‫–‬

‫‪Scene Menu‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪) Live Control‬ﺹ‪(56 .‬‬‫‪97‬‬‫‪G/Info Settings‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫]‪ :[q Info‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[LV-Info‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[G Settings‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪,99‬‬‫‪100‬‬‫‪Displayed Grid‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [w]، [x]، [y]، [X‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Histogram‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫]‪ :[Highlight‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Shadow‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪99‬‬‫‪Mode Guide‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪Live View Boost‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ؛ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Frame Rate‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [High‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Art LV Mode‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﺲ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪LV Close Up Mode‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪49‬‬‫‪Flicker reduction‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻌﺎﺵ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻌﺎﺵ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ ،[Auto‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [50Hz‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪ [60Hz‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫‪A‬‬‫‪P/A/‬‬‫‪S/M‬‬‫‪ART‬‬‫‪SCN‬‬‫‪87 AR‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪U Disp/8/PC‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪g‬‬‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪، [On‬ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻏﻼﻕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪ :[mode1] q Close Up Mode‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ U‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ) ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ (× 14‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ G‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ U‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‪ U‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Peaking Settings‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Backlit LCD‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[Hold‬‬‫—‬‫‪Sleep‬‬‫ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫)‪8 (Beep sound‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪USB Mode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪z lock‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪AR 88‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪V‬‬‫‪V Exp/p/ISO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪g‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪EV Step‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻗﺘﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪35‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫‪70‬‬‫‪ISO Step‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫—‬‫‪ISO-Auto Set‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Auto‬‬‫ﻟـ ‪.ISO‬‬‫]‪ :[High Limit‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Default‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪V‬‬‫‪V Exp/p/ISO‬‬‫‪ISO-Auto‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪g‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ]‪.ISO [Auto‬‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪.M‬‬‫]‪ :[P/A/S‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ً‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ISO200‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.M‬‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[All‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ً‬‫—‬‫‪Metering‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪68‬‬‫‪AEL Metering‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪.(93 .‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪BULB/TIME Timer‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪BULB/TIME‬‬‫‪Monitor‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [BULB]، [TIME‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[COMP‬‬‫—‬‫‪Live BULB‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺮﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪Anti-Shock z‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﺳﻜﻮﺑﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 0‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﻮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ )ﺹ‪ (61 .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫)ﺹ‪ .(61 .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ً‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Composite‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ )ﺹ‪.(36 .‬‬‫‪Live TIME‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪W‬‬

‫‪W # Custom‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬

‫—‬

‫‪6‬‬
‫—‬

‫—‬
‫‪c‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪g‬‬‫‪# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪100‬‬‫‪# Slow Limit‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪100‬‬‫‪w+F‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪68 ,46‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪89 AR‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪X K/Color/WB‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪K Set‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪g‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ‬‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪D Set‬‬‫‪ (1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪HI‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬‫)]‪([K1] – [K4‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪W SF‬‬‫‪W N‬‬

‫‪F‬‬

‫‪F‬‬

‫‪ (2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Y SF‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ]‪ [X‬ﻭ]‪.[W‬‬‫‪ (1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Xiddle‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪ [Wmall‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫‪2560×1920‬‬‫‪1280×960‬‬‫‪Xiddle‬‬‫‪Wmall‬‬‫‪63‬‬‫‪ (2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪AR 90‬‬‫‪63‬‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Shading Comp.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ً‬‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪WB‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪58‬‬‫> ‪All‬‬‫]‪ :[All Set‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ‬‫ﻋﺪﺍ ]‪.[CWB‬‬‫]‪ :[All Reset‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ‬‫]‪ [CWB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.0‬‬‫—‬‫‪W Keep Warm‬‬‫‪Color‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ "ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ" ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻫﺠﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪#+WB‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Color Space‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Y Record/Erase‬‬‫‪RAW+JPEG Erase‬‬‫‪File Name‬‬‫‪Edit Filename‬‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪dpi‬‬‫‪Copyright‬‬‫‪*Settings‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪g‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺹ‪.(28 .‬‬‫]‪ :[JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[RAW+JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫]‪) [All Erase‬ﺹ‪.(72 .‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺄﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Reset‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ 100‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫‪ 0001‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻠﻲ‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺟﺰء ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪Pmdd‬‬‫‪sRGB: Pmdd0000.jpg‬‬‫‪mdd‬‬‫‪Adobe RGB: _mdd0000.jpg‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )]‪ [Yes‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ([No‬ﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ً 63‬‬‫ﺣﺮﻓﺎ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Copyright Info.‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Exif‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Artist Name‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Copyright Name‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪63‬‬

‫—‬

‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬

‫‪ (1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ‪.2‬‬‫‪ (2‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ]‪ [END‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ‪ ،2‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬‫‪05/63‬‬‫‪Copyright Name‬‬‫‪ABCDE‬‬‫‪! ” # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . /‬‬‫? > = < ; ‪0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 :‬‬‫‪I J K L M N O‬‬‫_ ] [ ‪P Q R S T U V W X Y Z‬‬‫‪a b c d e f g h i j k l m n END‬‬‫} { ‪o p q r s t u v w x y z‬‬‫‪@ A B C D E F G H‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫—‬‫‪Delete‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪Quick Erase‬‬

‫‪Y‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Cancel‬‬‫* ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺰﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫]‪ .[Copyright Settings‬ﻭﺳﺘﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪91 AR‬‬‫‪Z Movie‬‬‫‪Z‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪g‬‬‫‪nMode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪62‬‬‫‪Movie R‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺻﺎﻣﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪70‬‬‫‪Movie Effect‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫‪37‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﺠﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ FG‬ﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪ K‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Movie+Photo‬‬‫‪Mode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪b‬‬‫‪b K Utility‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪g‬‬‫‪Pixel Mapping‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪135‬‬‫‪Exposure Shift‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪.(46 .‬‬‫—‬‫‪ : :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ‪.:‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Reset‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Adjust‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ‪.0‬‬‫—‬‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫*‪Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬‫—‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬‫‪119‬‬‫* ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ .[Eye-Fi‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﻼﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ" ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪.Eye-Fi‬‬‫‪AR 92‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫]‪[AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪S-AF AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ AEL/AFL‬ﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫‪AEL/S-AF‬‬‫‪Exposure‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪Half Way‬‬‫‪Fully‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪AFL‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﻠﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪mode2‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫–‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode2‬‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪mode4‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode2‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪MF‬‬‫]‪[MF Assist‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪ .MF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Magnify‬‬‫‪Peaking‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪) [AF Area] g .‬ﺹ‪(47 .‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺰﻳﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Peaking Settings] g‬ﺹ‪(88 .‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [Peaking‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺳﻨﺎﺩ‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [Button Function‬ﺹ‪.(94 .‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Peaking‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪93 AR‬‬‫‪Button Function‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫]‪[Button Function‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻸﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪[FnFunction] / [UFunction] / [RFunction]1* / [IFunction] / [GFunction] / [nFunction] /‬‬‫*‪([Direct Function]2* / [P]3*) / [lFunction]4‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻳﻌﻴّﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ‪FGHI‬‬‫*‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪AR 94‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫]‪ .[AEL/AFL‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،AEL‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬‫‪ u‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪R REC‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫)‪z (Preview‬‬‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [On‬ﻝ ]‪ [z Lock‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪) k‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬‫ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )ﺹ‪.(59 .‬‬‫‪) P‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪P Home‬‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ‬‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [P Set Home‬ﺹ‪ .(85 .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪RAWK‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫)‪K TEST (Test Picture‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Myset1 – Myset4‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Myset‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪u‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻃﻔﺎء ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.‬‬‫‪I/H‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪ H‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ I‬ﻭ ‪ H‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‬‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪) a‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Peaking‬‬‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫‪ ،Peaking‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪AF Stop‬‬‫ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟ ُﻤ َﻮ ﱢﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪BKT‬‬‫ﻳﺸ ّﻐﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ BKT‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪) GLock‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪Electronic Zoom‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪) b‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﻧﻔﺮﺗﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪95 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫‪U‬‬‫]‪[HDMI], [Video Out‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪(HD‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ّ .‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،AV‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪ [Video Out‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ‪.(87 .‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪(CB-AVC3 :‬‬‫)ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫)ﺃﺻﻔﺮ( ﻭﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‪(.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪A‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬‫)ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪(.‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ q‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪1080i‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪.1080i HDMI‬‬‫‪720p‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺝ ‪.720p HDMI‬‬‫‪480p/576p‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ‪ .480p/576p HDMI‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ 576p‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [PAL‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬‫]‪) [Video Out‬ﺹ‪.(87 .‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.USB‬‬‫‪AR 96‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(D‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫‪) [HDMI] g‬ﺹ‪(87 .‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫‪U‬‬‫]‪[KControl Settings‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ)ﺹ‪(98 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪P/A/S/M‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ)ﺹ‪(98 .‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ART/SCN‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ)ﺹ‪(98 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Q‬‬

‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪97 AR‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪c ba‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪e d‬‬‫‪f‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪LV‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ .................................. ISO‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪65 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ ..............‬ﺹ‪61 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ............................‬ﺹ‪58 .‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫‪ 7‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪ ............................. Sharpness N 8‬ﺹ‪74 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪ ........................................J‬ﺹ‪74 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ‪ .......................................T‬ﺹ‪74 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ‪ .......................................z‬ﺹ‪74 .‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪ ....................x‬ﺹ‪74 .‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .........................y‬ﺹ‪75 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪90 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﻋﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪94 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪48 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﺑﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪63 .‬‬‫‪ AF e‬ﻭﺿﻊ‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪69 .‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ............................‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪57 .‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ LV‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،INFO‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ART‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .SCN‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪AR 98‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪U‬‬‫]‪[G/Info Settings‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪) LV-Info‬ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [LV-Info‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪) [Histogram Settings] g .‬ﺹ‪(87 .‬‬‫‪) q Info‬ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [q Info‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪Shadow Highlight‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ [q Close Up Mode‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ]‪ [mode2‬ﻟﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺟﻨﺒًﺎ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﺃﻭ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،U‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،INFO‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫)‪ (P‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FGHI‬ﻻﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.U‬‬
‫‪U‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪54‬‬‫‪53‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪2x‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪99 AR‬‬‫‪) G Settings‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺫﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ .[G Settings‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪G‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪G‬‬

‫‪2014.7‬‬‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪10‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪ 9–100‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫]‪[# X-Sync.] [# Slow Limit‬‬

‫‪W‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪AR 100‬‬

‫‪A‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪M‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ(‬‫ﺇﺑﻄﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪)/1‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ×‪ (2‬ﻭ‬‫]‪[# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪[# Slow Limit‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ * ]‪[# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫* ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 1/180‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ FL-50R‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ‬‫ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺏ‬‫‪ .OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ً #‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ )ﺹ‪.(84 .‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ JPEG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻻﻣﻞ ﻭ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Send A Picture‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Send A Picture‬‬‫‪z‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ، PIN‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ‪ 0000‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Send Picture‬‬‫‪Sending‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ /‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ‬‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻞ ﻭ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪.JPEG‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [AOLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬ﻓﻲ ‪ #‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ )ﺹ‪.(101 .‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Please Wait‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﺠﺰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻻﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ]‪.[Receive Picture Request‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Accept‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ ، PIN‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ‪ 0000‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Accessory Port Menu‬‬‫‪OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬‬‫‪OLYMPUS PENPAL Album‬‬‫‪Electronic Viewfinder‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪c‬‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫‪3‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Search‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪Receive Picture‬‬‫‪Receiving‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫‪101 AR‬‬‫‪‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﻠﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [AOLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬ﻓﻲ ‪ #‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ )ﺹ‪.(101 .‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Address Book‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪A. OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬‬‫‪Please Wait‬‬‫‪Address Book‬‬‫‪My OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪Picture Send Size‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Address List‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺎﺕ‬‫ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻃﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [z‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [y‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Send A Picture‬‬‫‪z‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ‬‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻌﻘﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫‪A OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬‫‪AR 102‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻀﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ[‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫]ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪ :‬ﺃﺿﻒ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫]ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ[‪ :‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ‪.‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪g‬‬‫‪101‬‬‫‪102‬‬

‫‪A‬‬‫‪A OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻲ‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺘﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 1: Small‬ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻝ ‪.640 × 480‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 2: Large‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪.1920 × 1440‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 3: Medium‬ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻝ ‪.1280 × 960‬‬

‫‪g‬‬

‫‪B‬‬

‫‪B OLYMPUS PENPAL Album‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬‫‪Reset Protect‬‬‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪g‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭ ‪OLYMPUS‬‬‫‪ .PENPAL‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫ﺍﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻡ ‪.OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫ﺍﻇﻬﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻻﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬‫]‪.[Size 2: Medium‬‬‫]‪ [All Erase‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫]‪ [Format Album‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 1: Large‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 2: Medium‬ﺗﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻑ ﻳﺤﺠﻢ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪.1920 × 1440‬‬‫‪C‬‬‫‪C Electronic Viewfinder‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪101‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫‪102‬‬‫‪102‬‬‫‪102‬‬‫‪102‬‬‫‪102‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪g‬‬‫‪EVF Adjust‬‬‫ﻋﺪﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ‬‫‪ viewfinder‬ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪HI‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ (j‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻮﺣﻪ‬‫)‪ (k‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ FG‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ‬‫]‪ [+7‬ﻭ ]‪.[-7‬‬‫‪EVF Auto Switch‬‬‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪viewfinder‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪.VF-4‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ u‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ viewfinder‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ VF-4‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬‫‪EVF Adjust‬‬‫‪k‬‬‫‪+2‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪-5‬‬‫—‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪#‬‬‫‪102‬‬‫‪123‬‬‫‪103 AR‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﺰﻳ ٍﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪LAN‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻣﻮﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪OLYMPUS Image Share (OI.Share‬‬‫• ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪:‬‬‫‪http://oishare.olympus-imaging.com/‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪AR 104‬‬‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(145 .‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺒﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﻌﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ ً‬‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺳﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ‪ OI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Connection to Smartphone‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Connect Settings‬ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺎﻵﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ OI.Share‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ MENU‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]‪ [End Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ‪ OI.Share‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪" g .‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )]‪) "([Share Order‬ﺹ‪(28 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ OI.Share‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ QR‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [Connection to Smartphone‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ w‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Image Transfer‬‬‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Save‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪105 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ]‪.[Private‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [Connection to Smartphone‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ w‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Remote‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ]‪.[Private‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪ Add Location‬ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪.GPS‬‬‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪.(GPS‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.OI.Share‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .Add Location‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ‬‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪.(GPS‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [Connection to Smartphone‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ w‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪ (GPS‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.OI.Share‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪ (GPS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺠﻞ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪ (GPS‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ g‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺿﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪.(GPS‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 106‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬‫ﺛﻤﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ]‪ ،[Private‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨ ِﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ]‪ ،[One-Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Connect Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ]‪ :[Private‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.OI.Share‬‬‫• ]‪ :[One-Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻴﺔ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ OI.Share‬ﺳﻮﻯ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ]‪ :[Select‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ]‪ :[Off‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.R‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Private Password‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪.[Private‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Reset share Order‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ]‪.[Wi-Fi Settings‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Reset Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫‪107 AR‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫‪ OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻫﻮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻣﻦ "‪."http://support.olympus-imaging.com/ov3download/‬‬‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻛﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪.OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫‪Windows ‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬‫‪Windows XP‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ "‪) "Setup‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﻧﻬﺖ ‪ Microsoft‬ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.Windows XP‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺃﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Windows Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬‫"‪ "OLYMPUS Setup‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ "‪) "Setup‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ "‪ ،"Setup‬ﻓﺎﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ )‪ (OLYMPUS Setup‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ‪ Windows Explorer‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ "‪."LAUNCHER.EXE‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ "‪ ،"User Account Control‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ "‪ "Yes‬ﺃﻭ "‪."Continue‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ‬‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،USB‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫]‪.[Storage‬‬‫‪AR 108‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "‪) "Registration‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪Windows XP SP3/Windows Vista SP2/‬‬‫‪Windows 7 SP1/Windows 8/Windows 8.1‬‬‫‪ Pentium 4‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 1.3‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬‫)ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ Core2Duo‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 2.13‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‬‫‪ 3‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫‪ 1024 × 768‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫‪ 65,536‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑـ ‪ 16,770,000‬ﻟﻮﻥ(‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "‪ "OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫‪Macintosh ‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ً‬‫ً‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪ "Setup‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ‬‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬‫ً‬‫"‪."Setup‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "‪ "OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪109 AR‬‬‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Mac OS X v10.5–v10.9‬‬‫‪ Intel Core Solo/Duo‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 1.5‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬‫)ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ Core2Duo‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫‪ 1024 × 768‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫‪ 32,000‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑـ ‪ 16,770,000‬ﻟﻮﻥ(‬‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ‪ .USB Mass Storage Class‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪:USB‬‬‫‪:Windows‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪:Macintosh‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪/Windows XP SP3‬‬‫‪Windows Vista SP2/Windows 7 SP1/Windows 8/Windows 8.1‬‬‫‪Mac OS X 10.5 - v.10.9‬‬‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪USB‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ FG‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ .[Storage‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪Storage‬‬‫‪MTP‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ Windows Photo Gallery‬ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows 8 ،Windows 7 ،Windows Vista‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،Windows 8.1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [MTP‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺍ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪.USB‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬‫]‪) [USB Mode‬ﺹ‪ (88 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 110‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )‪(PictBridge‬‬‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‬‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫]‪ [Auto‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪) [USB Mode‬ﺹ‪ (88 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ ،[One Moment‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ‬‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫‪Storage‬‬‫‪MTP‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻝ "ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ" )ﺹ‪(112 .‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[Print‬‬‫‪USB‬‬‫‪Easy Print Start‬‬‫‪PC/Custom Print‬‬‫‪111 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪All Print‬‬‫‪Multi Print‬‬‫‪All Index‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻧُﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺠﺰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻼ‬‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪Size‬‬‫‪Borderless‬‬‫‪Pics/Sheet‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪AR 112‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫]‪.[Multi Print‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‬‫)ﺣﺠﺰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪123-3456‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪More‬‬‫)‪Print (f‬‬‫‪Single Print‬‬‫)‪(t‬‬‫)‪More (u‬‬‫‪Select‬‬‫‪Single Print‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺰ‬‫]‪ [Single Print‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺠﻮﺯﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﺠﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ]‪ ،[Single Print‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [All Print‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Option Set‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫×<‬‫‪Date‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪File Name‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (P‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻪ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺻﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Print‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Continue‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ]‪ [Cancel‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.MENU‬‬‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]<[‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]<[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ [U‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻛﺤﺠﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ GF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Q‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫<‬‫‪ALL‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ "ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ" ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬‫ً‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .DPOF‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [U‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪113 AR‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪AR 114‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]<[‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]<[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎء ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪،‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Keep‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ G‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ .0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺯﺍﻟﺘﻚ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬‫• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺰﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Release Lag-Time‬ﺹ‪ (86 .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Short‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‪.‬‬‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ‬‫ً‬‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻌﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ "ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(147 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 240‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫)‪ 50/60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﺤﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻟﻴﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ً‬‫ﺧﻠﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪115 AR‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ "ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ"‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪) SD‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ( ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،SDXC ،SDHC ،SD :‬‬‫ﻭ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ "‪ ،"LOCK‬ﻟﻦ‬‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪LOCK‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺮﻫﺎ‬‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ‬‫ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪) [Eye-Fi] g .‬ﺹ‪(92 .‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺒﻂء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪AR 116‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪.4:3‬‬‫‪4608×3456‬‬‫‪3200×2400‬‬‫‪2560×1920‬‬‫‪1920×1440‬‬‫‪1600×1200‬‬‫‪1280×960‬‬‫‪1024×768‬‬‫‪640×480‬‬‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪YSF‬‬‫‪YF‬‬‫‪YN‬‬‫‪YB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫)‪(Pixel Count‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬‫‪ORF‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬‫‪ 17‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 11‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 7.5‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 3.5‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 2.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 5.6‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 3.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.7‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 3.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 2.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.8‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.8‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.7‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.6‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.6‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ*‬‫‪41‬‬‫‪79‬‬‫‪114‬‬‫‪248‬‬‫‪369‬‬‫‪155‬‬‫‪257‬‬‫‪508‬‬‫‪753‬‬‫‪271‬‬‫‪398‬‬‫‪782‬‬‫‪1151‬‬‫‪476‬‬‫‪701‬‬‫‪1356‬‬‫‪1968‬‬‫‪678‬‬‫‪984‬‬‫‪1906‬‬‫‪2653‬‬‫‪1034‬‬‫‪1488‬‬‫‪2773‬‬‫‪3813‬‬‫‪1564‬‬‫‪2260‬‬‫‪4068‬‬‫‪5547‬‬‫‪3589‬‬‫‪5085‬‬‫‪7627‬‬‫‪10170‬‬‫*ﺑﺎﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ‬‫ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 9999‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫‪117 AR‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ M.ZUIKO DIGITAL‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Four Thirds‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.OM‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺒّﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒّﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪AR 118‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺠﺮﻯ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪ 4‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬‫‪ 7‬ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬‫‪ 8‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) UNLOCK‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ(‬‫‪ 9‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺯﺧﺮﻓﻴﻪ )ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﻠﻨﺴﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‬‫)‪(ED14-42mm f3.5-5.6EZ‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻤﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻌﻴﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Electronic Zoom Speed] g‬ﺹ‪(92 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ (LC-37C :‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺁﻟﻲ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬‫)‪(ED12-50mm f3.5-6.3EZ‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪MACRO‬‬‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫‪+‬‬‫‪MACRO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫‪) E-ZOOM‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺁﻟﻲ(‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪) M-ZOOM‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪) MACRO‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ(‬‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 0.2‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 0.5‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MACRO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ‬‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪119 AR‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ( ‪MF‬‬‫)‪) ED12mm f2.0، 17mm f1.8‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ(‪(ED12-40mm f2.8PRO ،‬‬‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪ ،MF‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬‫‪AF/MF‬‬‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F5.6‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ 17mm f1.8‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ED12mm f2.0‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،MF‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪(BCL-0980 Fisheye, BCL-1580‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪ MF‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﻏﻠﻖ ﺣﺎﺟﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪ (.57 .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 9‬ﻣﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ‪ BCL-0980 Fisheye‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 15‬ﻣﻢ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺃﺟﻞ ‪.BCL-1580‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺣﺎﺟﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪OM‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪Four Thirds‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 120‬‬‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬‫‪MF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﻧﻌﻢ*‬
‫ﻻ‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻌﻢ*‬‫ﻻ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬‫‪ED14-42mm‬‬‫‪f3.5-5.6 EZ‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬‫‪14-42mm‬‬‫‪f3.5-5.6 II R‬‬‫‪ED40-150mm‬‬‫‪f4.0-5.6R‬‬‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫‪ 42 – 14‬ﻣﻢ‬‫‪ 42 – 14‬ﻣﻢ‬‫‪ 150 – 40‬ﻣﻢ‬‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪f/3.5 – 5.6‬‬‫‪f/3.5 – 5.6‬‬‫‪f/4.0 – 5.6‬‬‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪75° – 29°‬‬‫‪75° – 29°‬‬‫‪30.3° – 8.2°‬‬‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 10‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 13‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺣﻴﺔ‬‫‪f/3.5 – 22‬‬‫‪f/3.5 – 22‬‬‫‪f/4.0 – 22‬‬‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫)ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﻡ – )‬‫)‪ 14‬ﻣﻢ(‬‫‪ 0.25‬ﻡ – )‬‫)‪ 42‬ﻣﻢ(‬‫‪ 0.25‬ﻡ – )‬‫)‪ 19 - 14‬ﻣﻢ(‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﻡ – )‬‫)‪ 42 - 20‬ﻣﻢ(‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﻡ – )‬‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪AF/MF‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻄﺮ × ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ(‬‫‪ 22.5 × l60.8‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪ 50 x l56.5‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪ 83 x l63.5‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﺠﺮﻯ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬‫‪ 37‬ﻣﻢ‬‫‪ 37‬ﻣﻢ‬‫‪ 58‬ﻣﻢ‬‫–‬‫‪LH-40D‬‬‫‪LH-61D‬‬‫‪25mm f1.8‬‬‫‪45mm f1.8‬‬‫‪BCL-0980‬‬‫‪Fisheye‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫‪ 25‬ﻣﻢ‬‫‪ 45‬ﻣﻢ‬‫‪ 9‬ﻣﻢ‬‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪f/1.8‬‬‫‪f/1.8‬‬‫‪f/8‬‬‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪49.5°‬‬‫‪27°‬‬‫‪140°‬‬‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 8‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺣﻴﺔ‬‫‪f/1.8 – 22‬‬‫‪f/1.8 – 22‬‬‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪f/8‬‬‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫)ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‬‫‪ 0.25‬ﻡ – )‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﻡ – )‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﻡ – )‬‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪AF/MF‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻨﺴﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء(‬‫‪ 93‬ﺟﻢ‬‫‪ 113‬ﺟﻢ‬‫‪ 190‬ﺟﻢ‬‫‪MF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻨﺴﻮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء(‬‫‪ 137‬ﺟﻢ‬‫‪ 116‬ﺟﻢ‬‫‪ 28‬ﺟﻢ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻄﺮ × ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ(‬‫‪ 42 x l57.8‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪ 46 x l56‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪ 12.8 x l56‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﺠﺮﻯ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬‫‪ 46‬ﻣﻢ‬‫‪ 37‬ﻣﻢ‬‫–‬‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪LH-49B‬‬‫‪LH-40B‬‬‫–‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺳﻤﻴﻚ‪.‬‬‫‪121 AR‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )‪(VF-4‬‬‫ﺗﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )‪ (VF-4‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺸﻐﻼ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ‪/Sleep‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺦ‪ /‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻔﺸﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺿﻮء‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺧﻠﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﺧﻠﻊ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻭﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻃﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭ ﺍﺯﻟﻪ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪AR 122‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺿﻊ ﺯﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪u‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ u‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [EVF Auto Switch‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Off‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ‪ #‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [CEVF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ u‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪VF-4‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ u‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )‪(VF-4‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺪﻉ ﺍﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 2,360,000‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪100 %‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪-1 50) 1.48‬ﻡ ‪ -1‬ﻣﻢ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ /‬ﻻﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 21‬ﻣﻢ )‪-1‬ﻡ ‪ ) (-1‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ(‬‫‪-1‬ﻡ ‪–4.0 +2.0‬‬‫‪ 42‬ﻏﻢ )‪ 0.09‬ﺑﺎﻭﻧﺪ( ) ﺩﻭﻥ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ(‬‫‪ 30.4‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ 48.2‬ﻣﻢ )ﻃﻮﻝ( × ‪) 47.8‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‬‫‪123 AR‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺘﻼءﻡ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ TTL-AUTO‬ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ‪ .Super FP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻫﻮ ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ*‪.‬‬‫‪ FL-50R‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ 1/180 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫*‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬‫‪FL-600R‬‬‫‪FL-300R‬‬‫‪FL-14‬‬‫‪RF-11‬‬‫‪TF-22‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪TTL-AUTO, AUTO, MANUAL,‬‬‫‪FP TTL AUTO, FP MANUAL‬‬‫‪TTL-AUTO, MANUAL‬‬‫‪TTL-AUTO, AUTO, MANUAL‬‬‫‪TTL-AUTO, MANUAL‬‬‫‪) GN‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ( )‪(ISO100‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪RC‬‬‫)‪ 24‬ﻢﻣ*‪ 85) GN20 (1‬ﻢﻣ*‪GN36 (1‬‬‫‪‬‬‫)‪ 28‬ﻢﻣ* ( ‪GN20‬‬‫)‪ 28‬ﻢﻣ*‪GN14 (1‬‬‫‪GN11‬‬‫‪GN22‬‬

‫‪‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫*‪ 1‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ )ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪AR 124‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ‬‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ RC‬ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﺷﻐﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ MODE‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.RC‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪ [# RC Mode‬ﻓﻲ ‪) X Shooting Menu 2‬ﺹ‪.(72 .‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ‪ LV‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.RC‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(RC‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Super FP‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Super FP‬‬‫‪A Mode‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [HI‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [MID‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪.[LO‬‬‫‪LO‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Ch‬‬‫‪+5.0‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫–‬‫‪+3.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪TTL‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪TTL‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻋﺪﻝ‬‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ‬‫‪ ،MANUAL‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺪﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﺭﻓﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬‫‪30°‬‬‫ﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﻯ ‪7m‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪30°‬‬‫‪60°‬‬‫‪50°‬‬‫‪50°‬‬‫‪5m‬‬‫‪100°‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪ٍ 4‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫)ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺘﺖ(‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻫﻮ ‪ 1/160‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪.RC‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪125 AR‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪:‬‬‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ 24‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ X‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ Olympus‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪.[AUTO‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬‫ﻓﻼﺷﺎ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪AR 126‬‬‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﺍﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﻼﺙ )‪(MMF-3/MMF-2‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ Four Thirds‬ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ .Four Thirds‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )‪(RM–UC1‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺑﺴﻂ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻸﺿﻮﺍء‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌُﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪. 10) .‬ﺹ(‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ .‬ﺭﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬‫ﻭﻳﺐ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ f) SCN‬ﺃﻭ ‪ w‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(m‬‬‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ )‪(MAL–1‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻴﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪(SEMA–1‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺠﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺼﺪﻙ ﺍﻻﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪ 3.5‬ﻣﻢ(‬‫‪127 AR‬‬‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪BCS-5‬‬‫‪BLS-50‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫‪VF-4‬‬‫‪VF-1‬‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫‪RM-UC1‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪/USB‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪/AV‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﻛﺘﻒ‬‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ‪ /‬ﺣﺰﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ *‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‬‫‪SD/SDHC/‬‬‫‪SDXC/Eye-Fi‬‬‫‪SEMA-1‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪1‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪OLYMPUS‬‬‫*‪PENPAL PP-13‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬‫‪MAL-1‬‬‫ﺿﻮء ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.OM‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 128‬‬‫‪ E-PL7 :‬ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬‫‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12mm f2.0‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f1.8‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f2.8‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 25mm f1.8‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 45mm f1.8‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 60mm f2.8 Macro‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 75mm f1.8‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 9-18mm f4.0-5.6‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-40mm f2.8 PRO‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-50mm f3.5-6.3 EZ‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 14-42mm f3.5-6.3 EZ‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 14-42mm f3.5-5.6 II R‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 14-150mm f4.0-5.6‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 40-150mm f4.0-5.6 R‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 75-300mm f4.8-6.7 II‬‬‫‪FCON-P01‬‬‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ‬‫‪WCON-P01‬‬‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬‫‪MCON-P01‬‬‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬‫‪MCON-P02‬‬‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Four Thirds‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪OM‬‬‫*‪MF-2 1‬‬‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪OM2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪FL-300R‬‬‫‪FL-14‬‬‫‪FL-600R‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫‪SRF-11‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫‪STF-22‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬‫*‪RF-112‬‬‫*‪TF-22 2‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬‫‪FC-1‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫*‪MMF-2/MMF-3 1‬‬‫*‪2‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬‫*‪ 3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻌﻘﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ eYE-fI‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪129 AR‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺩ‬‫• ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫• ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪) [Sleep]g .‬ﺹ‪(88 .‬‬‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،sleep‬ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ٍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪12‬‬‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ #‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺫﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬‫ﺿﻮء ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺗﻀﺎء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻻ‬‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬‫‪AR 130‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Noise Reduct.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Off‬‬‫‪) [Noise Reduct.] g‬ﺹ‪(88 .‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬‫]‪ [Digital Tele-converter‬ﻭ ]‪.[Image Aspect‬‬‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪" g‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ" )ﺹ‪(16 .‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،M‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﺮﺃﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺿﻮء ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻠﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻄﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﻗﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻳﺪﻙ ﻟﺤﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ً‬‫‪" g‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ" )ﺹ‪(118 .‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ( ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ )ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ( ﻣﻠﺼﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪.[Pixel Mapping‬‬‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ‪ - Pixel Mapping" g‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺹ‪(135 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪:‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [T‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[Noise Reduct.‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫‪131 AR‬‬‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ‬‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Card‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ "‪ ."LOCK‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(116 .‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Card Error‬‬‫‪Write Protect‬‬‫‪Card Full‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Clean the contact area of‬‬‫‪the card with a dry cloth.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪Clean Card‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ ،[Clean Card‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺍﻏﻠﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﺑﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ ,[Format][Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Picture‬‬‫‪Picture Error‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ً‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺻﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪ The Image Cannot‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪Be Edited‬‬‫‪Picture Error‬‬‫‪AR 132‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﻰ‬‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﻳﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪m‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Battery Empty‬‬‫‪No Connection‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺰﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Paper‬‬‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Ink‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺸﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء‬‫ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ‬‫ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(14 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪Jammed‬‬‫‪Settings Changed‬‬‫‪Print Error‬‬‫‪Cannot Print‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪133 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻏﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﺑﺼﺎﺑﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ‬‫ﻭﺍﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺟﻔﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻔﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﻴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﺘﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪12‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻴﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺒّﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒّﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﻏﻄﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻹﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ً .‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 134‬‬‫‪ - Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﻲ ‪) c Custom Menu‬ﺹ‪.b (92 .‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ]‪ [Busy‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪135 AR‬‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬.[Myset] ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬:1*.[Reset] ‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬Full] ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬:2*.[Reset] ‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬Basic] ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬:3*

K Shooting Menu
g
72
73
60
63
62
81
61
57

3*

2*

1*












































76
77

79















80





124







g

3*

2*

1*

j Natural
YN
X
4:3
Off
o
S-IS AUTO
M-IS OnOff
3f 1.0EV
―
―
―
―
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
99
00:00:01
00:00:01
Off
Off‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬Card Setup
Reset/Myset
Picture Mode
Still Picture
Movie‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬W

K
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converterj/Y

Still Picture
Movie

X

Image Stabilizer
Bracketing

AE BKT

A–B
WB BKT
G–M
FL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT

12
HDR

Frame
Auto Gain
Overlay‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

77
77
77
78



‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬――Multiple Exposure
Time Lapse Settings

Frame
Start Waiting TimeInterval TimeTime Lapse Movie# RC Modeq Playback Menu

55

81
82
82
83
83
113
83
105















‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬―‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
Start
BGM
Slide
Slide IntervalMovie Interval

Joy
All
3 sec
Short
On
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

RAW Data Edit
JPEG Edit
R‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬qm

R
Sel. Image

Edit

Image Overlay
Print Order
Reset Protect
Connection to Smartphone

AR 136

d Setup Menu
g 3*
16
84
84
84

2*




1*



‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬――j ±0, k ±0, Vivid
0.5 secXW*i
Rec View

Wi-Fi Connect
Settings
Private Password
Reset share Order
Reset Wi-Fi SettingsOffc Menu Display
Off# Menu Display‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬dPrivate



―
―
―

107

84

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬



―

84

Wi-Fi Settings

c/# Menu
Display
Firmware.‫* ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬c Custom Menu
g 3*

2*

1*

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬AF/MF

12‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

85


















































mode1
mode2
mode1

S-AF
C-AF
Off
S-AF
C-AF
MF
On
On
b
Off
Off
o
On
K
On
L
U
RREC







86





137 AR

#
j/Y
Direct Function
AF StopF
FNo.
Shutter
Shutter
Prev/Next
Dial1
Exposure
Dial1
Ps
Off

Still Picture
Movie‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬Rc

AF ModeFull-time AF
AEL/AFL

Reset Lens
BULB/TIME Focusing
Focus Ring
Magnify
MF Assist
Peaking
P Set HomeAF Illuminat.
I Face Priority
AF Area PointerButton/Dial;Function
UFunction
RFunction
ButtonIFunction
Function
GFunctionnFunctionlFunction
P
A
Dial
S
FunctionMq
Dial Direction
Mode Dial Function

S

g 3*

2*

1*

























86

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬OffOn
3.5 fps
8 fps
Off
On
Off
Normal











‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬Release/j T
Rls Priority S
Rls Priority C
j L fpsj H fpsj Image Stabilization
Half Way Rls With IS
Lens I.S. Priority
Release Lag-Time
Disp/8/PC

1080i
Off




―






87










































88



























Image Only, u, Level
Gauge
O, Calendar
OffAll On255
0On
Off
Normal
mode1
mode2
Auto
Off
mode1
White
Hold
1 min
On
Auto

U

c

HDMI

Video Out
iAUTO
P/A/S/M KControl
Settings
ART
SCN
q Info
LV-Info

G/InfoSettings

G Settings
Displayed Grid
Picture Mode Settings
Highlight Histogram
Settings
Shadow
Mode Guide
Live View Boost
Rate ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬Art LV Mode
LV Close Up Mode
Flicker reduction
zLock

12
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

Live Guide
Live Control
Art Menu
Scene Menu
Image Only, Overallll

HDMI OutHDMI Control

qClose Up Mode
Peaking Settings
Backlit LCD
Sleep
8
USB Mode

AR 138

g 3*

88

2*

1*

ISO-Auto
Metering
AEL Metering
BULB/TIME Timer
BULB/TIME Monitor
Live BULB
Live TIME
Anti-Shock z
Composite Settings# X-Sync.

























Exp/p/ISOEV Step
Noise Reduct.
Noise Filter
ISO
ISO Step

















89

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬

1/3EV
Auto
Standard
Auto
1/3EV
High Limit: 1600
Default: 200
P/A/S
p
Auto
8 min
-7
Off
0.5 sec
Off
1 sec











‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ISO-Auto Set# Custom89

12‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
90







1/250







1/60

# Slow Limit







Off

w+F
K/Color/WB







K1 YF, K2 YN, K3 XN,
K4 WN

K Set























Xiddle
Pixel
Count
Wmall
Shading Comp.
WB
All SetAll >All Reset3200 x 2400
1280 x 960
Off
A : 0, G : 0
Auto
—
—
On





WB AUTO







sRGB















Off
RAW+JPEG
Reset
Off
No
350dpi
Off




91



—
—

139 AR‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬VW

X

W Keep Warm Color#+WB
Color Space
Record/Erase
Quick Erase
RAW+JPEG Erase
File Name
Edit Filename
Priority Set
dpi Settings
Copyright Info.
Copyright
Artist Name
Settings
Copyright Name

Y

g 3*



92

2*








1*

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
P
On
On
Off
±0
On
mode1



—


92

±0



±0






—
On
On
NormalNormal



Movie
nMode
Movie R
Movie EffectWind Noise Reduction
Recording Volume
KVolume Limiter
Movie+Photo Mode
K Utility
Pixel Mappingp
ExposureJ
Shift
5
Warning Level :Level Adjust
Touch Screen Settings
Eye-FiStill Picture
Electronic
Movie Zoom Speed‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬Zcb# Accessory Port Menu
g 3*

2*

102

103

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬OLYMPUS PENPAL Share A#—

Please Wait—

Address List
Address
Search TimerBook
New Pairing
My OLYMPUS PENPAL

30 sec——Size 1: Small



—
—
—
—
Size 2: Medium

103

103

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬

j ±0, k ±0
OnPicture Send Size
OLYMPUS PENPAL Album
Copy All
Reset Protect
Album Mem. UsageAlbum Mem. Setup
Picture Copy Size
Electronic Viewfinder
EVF Adjust
EVF Auto Switch

12‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

101,
102

1*

B

C

AR 140‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪4/3" Live MOS‬‬‫‪ 17,200,000‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 16,050,000‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 17.3‬ﻣﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 13.0‬ﻣﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬‫‪(4:3) 1.33‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪Live MOS‬‬‫‪100%‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ‪ LCD ،‬ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ‪ TFT‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ "‪ 3.0‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬‫‪ 1,040,000‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪(2 :3‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫‪ 1/4000 - 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪ 81‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪) TTL‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬‫‪) EV -2 - 20‬ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪(M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f2.8, ISO100‬‬‫‪ :P/iAUTO :A‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪/‬‬‫‪ :A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ :S/‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ :M/‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ :ART/PHOTO STORY :J/‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ :SCN/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ :n/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪ ,1/3) LOW, 25600 - 200‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪(EV 1‬‬‫)‪±5 EV (1/3, 1/2, 1 EV step‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ Micro Four Thirds Standard‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬‫‪ ،M.Zuiko Digital‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺿﻌﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ 7‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪/‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫‪SD, SDHC, SDXC and Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪UHS-I‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪) JPEG ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ )‪ ،((DCF‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪،RAW‬‬‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪MP‬‬‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‪ Exif 2.3‬ﻭﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻭﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PRINT Image‬‬‫‪Matching III‬ﻭﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪Wave‬‬‫‪MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 / Motion JPEG‬‬‫‪Stereo, PCM 48kHz‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫‪141 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪(T‬‬‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 12 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ 2/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ 1 :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 5 :‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬‫) ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬‫‪IEEE 802.11b/g/n‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ )ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪/(AV‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪.(D‬‬‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ × ‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫‪ 114.9‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪ 67‬ﻣﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ(× ‪ 38.4‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬‫‪ 357‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 40 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ 20– /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 60 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫‪) TTL-AUTO‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ‪MANUAL/ (TTL‬‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬‫‪ 30%‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 90%‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ 10% /‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 90%‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬‫‪FL-LM1 Flash ‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪AR 142‬‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫)‪(10 (ISO200•m)) 7 (ISO100•m‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ 14‬ﻣﻢ )‪ 28‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ(‬‫‪ 39.2‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ 32.2‬ﻣﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 43.4‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫ﺣﺰﺍﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 25‬ﻏﻢ )‪ 0.06‬ﺑﺎﻭﻧﺪ(‬‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ٌ‬‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪High-Definition‬‬‫‪ Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫‪BLS-50‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫‪ 7.2‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬‫‪1210 mAh‬‬‫‪ 500‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 40 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬‫‪ 35.5‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ 12.8‬ﻣﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 55‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 46‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‬‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ(‬‫‪BCS-5‬‬‫‪ 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 240‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ 50/60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬‫‪ 8.35‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ 400 ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒَﺎ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ(‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 40 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪/‬‬‫–‪ 20‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ 60 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬‫‪ 62‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ 38‬ﻣﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 83‬ﻣﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ 70‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺰﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪143 AR‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻬﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻃﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪AR 144‬‬‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ — ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ — ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﺮﻭﺳﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ — ﻷﻣﺎﻧﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ — ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻕ — ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﻜﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ — ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‬‫ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ — ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ — ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤَﻮﻗﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪،‬‬‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻀﺨﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬‫‪ .Olympus‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺃﺑ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺤﺮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﺮﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻭ‬‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤُﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮَﻃﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪) LED‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻳﻪ ﺍﻑ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ )ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﻢ(‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺑﻖ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻟﻚ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ُ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺒﺎﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬‫ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻭﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻼﻑ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺨﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺿﺮﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺍﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻫﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ً‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺃﺻﺎﺏ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺸﺮﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ‬‫ﺧﻠﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ ﻭﻏﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻤﺎء ﻧﻘﻲ ﻭﺟﺎﺭ ﻭﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻨﻌﻬﺎ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺎﺑﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻚ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻗﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﺤﻖ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺗُﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻚ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻏﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎء ﻧﻘﻲ ﻭﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻨﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ‬‫ﻃﻔﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDXC/SDHC/SD‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬‫‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ‬‫ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺠﻴﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪145 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪AR 146‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‬‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺣﻮﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ ٍﺪ ﻋﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ‬‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻄﻼ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬‫ﺿﺮﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟ ًﻐﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬‫ً‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ُﻋ ً‬‫ﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻐﻄﻰ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ‬‫ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‬‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﺪﺍء ﻗﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‬‫ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬‫ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤَﺮﻛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻃﻴﺐ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﻄﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫ً‬‫ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌًﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ًﺩﺍ‬‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‪/‬ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء‬‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ًﺩﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬‫‪ .Olympus‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ‬‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬‫ﻭﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﻭﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﻴﻦ‬‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬‫‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﺎﻣﻀﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻄﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺘﻌﺮﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ؛ ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ‬‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﺇﺯﺍء ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬‫ﺃﻡ ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺿﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻻ‬‫ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ( ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ‬‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‬‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﺧﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫•‬‫• ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻧﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻻﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﺛﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻑء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻟﻠﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺷﺮﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬‫ﻛﻮﻛﺒﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )ﺍﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻎ(‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ً‬‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻒ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻴﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪147 AR‬‬‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍ ًء‬‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪،‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Olympus‬‬‫ﺑﺤﻖ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻌﻴﺐ‪،‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ً‬‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ OLYMPUS EUROPA SE & Co. KG‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬‫ﻣﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪:‬‬‫‪ ،http://www.olympus-europa.com‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪،‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ ﺑﻨﺎءًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬‫‪ Olympus‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻛﻤﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺿﻴﻚ ﻭﺑﺄﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪http://consumer-service.olympus-europa.com‬‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ )ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ( ﺃﻭ ﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬‫ﻭﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻣﻨﻪ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪OLYMPUS EUROPA SE & Co. KG‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪:‬‬‫‪ ،http://www.olympus-europa.com‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬‫‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﻤﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻭ ﺳﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﻬﺮ‬‫ﻭﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺴﻴﻤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ(‬‫ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ‪ Olympus‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ‪،‬‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬‫)ﺃ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺫﻛﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ(‬‫)ﺏ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻼء ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪AR 148‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪ "CE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬‫ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬‫"‪ "CE‬ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺮ‬‫‪ Olympus Imaging Corp.‬ﻭ‬‫‪Olympus Europa SE & Co. KG‬‬
‫ﺑﺄﻥ ‪ E-PL7‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ‪.EC/1999/5‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ‪:‬‬‫‪http://www.olympus-europa.com/‬‬‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]ﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺠﻞ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﻄﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ [4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]ﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺠﻞ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﻄﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬‫‪ 2006/66/EC‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ [2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫ﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻹﻟﺰﺍﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‪.‬‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫‪THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE‬‬‫‪AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR‬‬‫‪THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL‬‬‫‪USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE‬‬‫‪VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC‬‬‫)‪STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii‬‬‫‪DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED‬‬‫‪BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL‬‬‫‪AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR‬‬‫‪WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER‬‬‫‪LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO‬‬‫‪LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE‬‬‫‪IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL‬‬‫‪INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM‬‬‫‪MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE‬‬‫‪HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪6‬‬‫)ﺟـ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻘﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﻣﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫)ﺩ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺯﻟﺰﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻀﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﺎﻋﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺍﺭﺙ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫)ﻫـ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺜﺎﻟﻴﻦ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﻗﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫)ﻭ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫)ﺯ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺜﻨﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬‫ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻜﺒﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﻠﻞ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‬‫ﻷﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬‫‪.Microsoft Corporation‬‬‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Eye-Fi,‬‬‫‪.Inc‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ "ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪Apical‬‬‫ّ‬‫‪.Limited‬‬‫‪،Micro Four Thirds، Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﻭ ‪Four‬‬‫‪ Thirds‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪OLYMPUS IMAGING Corporation‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ PENPAL‬ﻟﻼﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi, Inc.‬‬‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪Wi-Fi CERTIFIED‬‬‫ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﻟﺘﺤﺎﻟﻒ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪.Alliance‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬‫"ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ "DCF/‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺺ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫)‪.(JEITA‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺨﺺ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﻳﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﺭﺧﺼﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻟﻴﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬‫ﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ PDF‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪http://www.olympus.co.jp/en/support/imsg/‬‬‫‪digicamera/download/notice/notice.cfm‬‬‫‪149 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬B

Symbols

76 ............................................(‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬BKT
85 .......................... BULB/TIME Focusing
89 .............................BULB/TIME Monitor
89 ................................BULB/TIME Timer

124 .......................................RC Mode #84 ................................................... W
84 .................................. ‫ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬#/c
85 .............................‫ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬P‫ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬I
85 ,48 ............................(‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬86 ............................................. H fps j
86 .............................................. L fps j
87 .................................. Info Settings/G
87 ............................ Control Settings K
88 .....................................................LVz
88 ...................................... ‫ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬q
89 ........................................Slow Limit #89 ........................................... .X-Sync #89 ................................................. F+w
90 ................................................. WB+#
92 ............................. Warning Level 8
94 ................................................ H/I
52 ,26 .............................(‫ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬G
52 ,27 ............................(‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬U
92 .............................................. Mode n
28 .............................. (‫ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
28 ................................... (‫ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬v
54 ,27 .....................................(‫ )ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬090 ......................... Keep Warm Color W
81 ....................................(‫ )ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬R
90 ................................................ Set K
88 ....................................................... 854 ................................... (‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬R
84 .............................(‫ )ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬i55 .................................. (‫ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬m

C
69 .................................................... C-AF
69 ............................................. C-AF+TR
90 .........................................Color Space
89 ............................. Composite Settings
91 ............................... Copyright Settings
85 ............................... (c) Custom Menu

D
86 ....................................... Dial Direction
86 ........................................Dial Function
91 ..........................................dpi Settings

E
91 .......................................Edit Filename
92 ....................... Electronic Zoom Speed
103 ....................................................EVF
88 ............................................... EV Step
92 ..................................... Exposure Shift
92 .................................................. Eye-FiF
91 ............................................ File Name
11 ........................................................ Fn
85 ......................................... Full-time AF

H
86 ........................... Half Way Rls With IS
87 ................................................... HDMI
78 .....................................................HDR
87 .............................. Histogram SettingsI
24 ,20 ,17 ......................... (A) iAUTO
87 ...............(G/Info ‫ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬Info SettingsA
33 ........................ (‫ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬A
90 .......................................... AdobeRGB
93 ,85 ........................................ AEL/AFL
89 .......................................AEL Metering
47 ......................................(P) AF Area
85 ............... (AF illuminator) AF Illuminat.
44 .................................. (‫ )ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ART

AR 150‫‪88 ,70 ................................................ ISO‬‬‫‪89 ..............................................ISO-Auto‬‬‫‪88 ....................................... ISO-Auto Set‬‬‫‪88 .............................................. ISO Step‬‬‫‪L‬‬‫‪ .Lens I.S‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪86 .....................................‬‬‫‪92 ......................................... Level Adjust‬‬‫‪89 ............................................Live BULB‬‬‫‪89 ............................................ Live TIME‬‬‫‪87 ................................... Live View Boost‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪) M‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ( ‪35 ....................................‬‬‫‪94 ....................................................... MF‬‬‫‪93 ,85 ....................................... MF Assist‬‬‫‪) MF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ( ‪120 ,69 ...........................‬‬‫‪86 ..............................Mode Dial Function‬‬‫‪87 ......................................... Mode Guide‬‬‫‪92 ,70 ......................................... Movie R‬‬‫‪92 ............................. Movie+Photo Mode‬‬‫‪110 ................................................... MTP‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪88 .......................................... Noise Filter‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪) P‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪32 ......................................‬‬‫‪39 ...................................PHOTO STORY‬‬‫‪87 ......................... Picture Mode Settings‬‬‫‪90 .......................................... Pixel Count‬‬‫‪111 ................................................... Print‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪91 ......................................... Quick Erase‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪63 .................................................... RAW‬‬‫‪91 .............................. RAW+JPEG Erase‬‬‫‪92 ............................... Recording Volume‬‬‫‪86 ............................... Release Lag-Time‬‬‫‪85 .......................................... Reset Lens‬‬‫‪73 .........................................Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪ Rls‬ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪86 .......................................C/S‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫‪) S‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ‪34 .................................‬‬‫‪69 .................................................... S-AF‬‬‫‪69 ............................................. S-AF+MF‬‬‫‪) SCN‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ(‪42 ...................................‬‬‫‪90 ....................................Shading Comp.‬‬‫‪90 ................................................... sRGB‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫‪92 .........................Touch Screen Settings‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪88 ........................................... USB Mode‬‬‫‪V‬‬‫‪87 .............................................Video Out‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪90 ,58 .................................................WB‬‬‫ﺃ‬‫ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ‪69 ................................................. AF‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪94 ......................................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪72 ..............................................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪94 ............................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪73 ..............................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪107 ....................................... Wi-Fi‬‬‫)‪60 ,44 ..................................(Grainy Film‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪28 .................................... (v‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ( ‪60 ...................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪84 .............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪116 ,13 .............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﺔ ‪124 ........................... SD‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ‪76 ......................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪56 ............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪110 ..................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪54 .....................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪49 .....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )‪120 ,69 .................. (MF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪49 ................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪109 ..................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪54 ..........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ ‪52 .........................................‬‬‫‪151 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪18 ...................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪18 .............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ‪35 ............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬‫ُﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪36 ................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺄﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫)‪ S‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ( ‪34 ...................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ‪80 ................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‪ /‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ( ‪35 .................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪96 ......................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻤﻮﻝ ‪88 ,15 ..............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪94 ,24 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪51 ,47 ,31 .................................. INFO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪107 ........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪12 .....................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ‪19 ................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪117 ,63 ............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ‪30 ..................................‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪50 ..............................................‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﻞ ‪30 .............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪124 ........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪68 .....................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪61 .............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪95 ,81 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪22 ................................................. AF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪35 .................... (M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪37 ..............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪103 ...............................................‬‬‫ﺏ‬‫ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪43 ....................................................‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ‪45 ...........................................‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪37 .................................................‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪82 ........................................... JPEG‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪82 .....................................‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪82 .................................... RAW‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ‪42 .....................................................‬‬‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ‪135 ..........................................‬‬‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪83 ............................................‬‬‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ‪28 ..........................................‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ AF‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪69 .................................‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪37 ...............................................‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪26 ......................................................‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪27 ,26 .........................................‬‬‫‪AR 152‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪53 ..............................................‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ‪35 ...............................‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ‪80 .............................‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ‪36 ............................................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ‪79 ..................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ‪46 ..............................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ‪35 ............................................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪32 .............................................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪32 .................................... (%‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﺠﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ‪92, 90 ................................‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ( ‪52 ..........‬‬‫ﺗﻼﺷﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪37 .............................................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ‪72 ....................................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﺔ ‪72 ..................... SD‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ‪105 ........................‬‬‫ﺝ‬‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ > ‪90 .............................................‬‬‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ < ‪113 ......................................‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪117 ,64 ,63 ................................‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪63 ...............................................‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪103 ......................................‬‬‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪85 ,83 .................................‬‬‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ‪88 .........................................‬‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪85 ..............................................‬‬‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪103 ...................................‬‬‫ﺱ‬‫ﺳﻜﻮﻥ‪88 ......................................................‬‬‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪87 .............................................‬‬‫ﺹ‬‫ﺻﺪﻯ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪37 ........................................‬‬‫ﺻﺪﻯ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪37 ...............................................‬‬‫ﺻﺪﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﺍﺳﻠﺔ ‪88 .......................... OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ‪99 ...........................................‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﺎﻓﺮﺓ( ‪88 .......‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪91 .............................................‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪16 ................................. X‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪85 ,48 ....‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪69 .....................AF‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪48 .............‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻞ ‪46 ..............................‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪68 ..................................‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪68 ...................................w‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪55 ,27 ..............................‬‬‫ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ‪89 ...............................................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪28 .........................................‬‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‪106 .........................................‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪31 ...........................................‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪90 ,58 ...............................‬‬

‫ﻉ‬

‫ﻥ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪84 ...........................................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪100 ,52 ,29 ,26 .........................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪55 ...........................................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪27 ,26 ..............................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪100 ,52 ,29 ,26 .......................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪ #/c‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ‪84 ................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪31 ...................................‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪51 ........................................‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪51 ...............................‬‬‫ﻑ‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪64 ........................................................‬‬‫ﻕ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪84 ..............................................‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪81 ..............................................‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪72 ............................................‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪94 ,93 ,30 ....................................... AE‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪88 ................................................‬‬‫ﻩ‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ( ‪47 .......‬‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪85 ,69 ...........................................AF‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪73 ............................................Myset‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪33 ................................‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪42 .............................................‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪32 .................... (P‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﻭﺿﻊ ‪69 ..................... (AF‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪74 ,60 ......................................‬‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪86 ................................................‬‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪97 ......................‬‬‫ﻡ‬‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪57 .............................................‬‬‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪37 ................................................‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪44 .............................................‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪66 ..............................................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪15 ...................................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ‪28 .......................................................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ‪72 ,28 .................................................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪72 ..................................................‬‬‫‪153 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪2014.07.‬‬‫‪WC626801‬‬